JP2011072683A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which permits a new game performance to be achieved while conforming to restrictions imposed on determination processing relating to winning and losing of a jackpot. <P>SOLUTION: The game machine permits the new game performance to be achieved while conforming to the restrictions imposed on the determination processing relating to the presence of a winning condition for the following reasons: whether or not a performance condition is established at least at the time when the winning condition is established before establishment of an opening condition is determined after a start condition is established; any one of performance modes is determined from among a plurality of performance modes set so as to vary the execution rate in accordance with the degree of establishment expectation of the winning condition; and following the execution of a leading performance of the performance mode whose degree of establishment expectation of the winning condition is lowest of the plurality of performance modes irrespective of which kind of the performance mode is determined, the performance mode of the ongoing leading performance is changed to the performance mode whose degree of establishment expectation of the winning condition is next lowest every time when the determination is made to change the performance mode of the leading performance in accordance with establishment of a condition for the change. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012352), a gaming machine in which a determination process for winning a big hit is performed when a game ball is received at a start port It has been known.

  In such a gaming machine, the reception of the game ball at the start opening is monitored, and when the game ball is received at the start opening, the determination on the big hit is performed with a predetermined winning probability. As a result of this determination, when a big win is won, a big hit game is performed in which a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player. Note that one predetermined winning probability may be controlled to a high probability state in which setting is changed to a higher probability by the probability variation function when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In addition, when the determination process for winning a big hit is performed, a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal screen. Next, whether or not the plurality of symbols variably displayed in this manner are stopped and displayed in a specific symbol combination that suggests that the winning combination is won, and the high probability after the end of the jackpot game among the specific symbol combinations An expected effect is produced as to whether or not to stop display with a special symbol combination that suggests that the state is controlled. In addition, when controlled to the above high probability state, the player desires to continue the high probability state and pays attention to whether or not the special symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state. You can enjoy the above-mentioned expectation about whether or not to stop display with the symbol combination, and you can enjoy the game by recognizing the result of the determination process from the symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed. .

  In addition, in this type of gaming machine including the gaming machine described in the same document 1, every time a game ball enters the start opening, a determination process (winning determination process) for winning a big hit is a predetermined upper limit. In many cases, the state is put on hold until a certain number of times, so that the execution of these determination processes is temporarily waited. That is, every time a predetermined starting condition is established, the winning determination process that is put in the hold state in this way is sequentially digested so that the winning determination process is continuously performed without interruption.

JP 2008-012352 A

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, the expected effect performed on the liquid crystal screen is important for improving the game interest of the player. Whether there is such a device has become a concern when playing games.

  However, in a gaming machine that realizes the above-mentioned reserved game, even if a game ball is inserted into the start opening, the winning determination process corresponding to the entrance is performed when a predetermined start condition is established. It is not executed until it is in order. Accordingly, it has been difficult to provide outstanding originality as the above-mentioned expected effect performed based on the result of the winning determination process that imposes such restrictions.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of realizing a novel game effect while observing the restrictions imposed on the determination process for winning a big hit. Objective.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1, after the start condition is established, a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of symbol information and derives and displays the display result based on the establishment of the start condition In a gaming machine that controls to a profit granting state to give a profit to a player after deriving and displaying a specific display result on the variable display device when a predetermined winning condition is established,
Effect condition determining means for determining whether or not an effect condition satisfied when at least the winning condition is satisfied is determined before the start condition is satisfied;
Start information storage means capable of storing start information indicating that the start condition is satisfied, up to a predetermined number so that the order in which the start conditions are satisfied can be specified;
Start winning determination means for determining whether or not the winning condition is satisfied based on the start information for which the start condition is satisfied among the start information stored in the start information storage means when the start condition is satisfied;
Start state determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied when the winning condition determination means determines that the winning condition is satisfied;
A variation mode of the variable display device from the start of variation display of the plurality of types of symbol information to the derivation display of the display result based on the determination result of the start time determination unit and the start state determination unit. A variation mode determining means for determining;
Display control for controlling the display of the variable display device based on the variation mode determined by the variation mode determination unit, and for deriving and displaying the display results according to the determination results of the start time failure determination unit and the start time state determination unit. Means,
Based on the determination result of the effect condition determination means, whether or not to execute a prior effect that suggests that the ratio to control to the profit granting state is high before the start condition of the start information corresponding to the start condition is satisfied Preceding effect determination means for determining whether or not,
A preceding effect executing means for executing the preceding effect when the preceding effect determining means determines that the preceding effect is to be executed;
As the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect executing means, the effect condition determining means is selected from among a plurality of types of effect modes set so that the ratios to be executed differ according to the expected degree of establishment of the winning condition. The production mode determination means for determining any production mode according to the determination result,
Effect mode change determining means for determining whether or not to change the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition;
The preceding effect executing means is the preceding of the effect mode having the lowest expected establishment condition of the winning condition among the plurality of types of effect modes, regardless of which effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining unit. After executing the production, every time the production mode change determination means determines that the production mode of the preceding production is changed, the success condition is expected to be established next to the production mode of the preceding production being executed. Change to a low production mode and execute the preceding production,
The effect mode change determination means, when the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect execution means matches the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means, the effect mode of the preceding effect It is characterized in that it is determined not to change.

  As described above, according to the present invention, after the start condition is satisfied, before the start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not an effect condition that is satisfied at least when the winning condition is satisfied is determined, and the expected condition of the winning condition is satisfied. The production mode determined by the production mode determination unit is determined as one of the production modes according to the determination result of the production condition determination unit from a plurality of types of production modes set so that the proportions to be executed are different. Regardless of which is the effect type, after performing the preceding effect of the effect mode having the lowest expected establishment condition of the winning condition among the plurality of types of effect modes, the effect mode of the preceding effect is changed in accordance with the satisfaction of the change condition Each time the determination is made, it is changed to the production mode with the lower expected expectation condition of the winning condition next to the production mode of the preceding production that is being executed. conditions While complying with constraints imposed on according to existence determination process, it is possible to realize a novel game effects.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 46 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 48 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box part). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component member, a game panel, and a panel holder in the game board of the second embodiment different from the game board shown in FIGS. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise the game board of 2nd embodiment, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hitting ball | bowl launcher and the launch rail in the state which is not operating the operation handle part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the payout control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of back view of the pachinko machine which shows the wiring etc. of a payout control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of a game board for illustrating a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which open | released the cover body. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the state where a cover body concerning a second embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps and contacts the lower part of the cover object concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a perspective view showing only an attacker unit, a side prize opening member, and a center accessory in the game board from an oblique front, and (B) is a perspective view showing (A) from an oblique rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper unit in a back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the upper unit from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper unit in the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a front view of the rotating decorative body unit in the upper unit, (B) is a perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit as viewed from diagonally forward, and (C) is a perspective view of the rotational decorative body unit as viewed diagonally from behind. It is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decoration body unit in an upper unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the rotation decoration body which is movable by rotation in a rotation decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism which raises / lowers the rotation decoration unit in an upper unit. (A) is a rear view of the lifting mechanism of FIG. 168, and (B) is a rear view of the lifting mechanism of (A) with an upper unit cover added. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the raising / lowering mechanism in an upper unit. (A) is a perspective view which shows the rocking | flush decoration body unit in an upper unit from diagonally forward, (B) is a perspective view which shows a rocking | flush decoration body unit from diagonally behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the swing decorative body unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the swing decorative body unit for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a rocking | fluctuation decoration body unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left movable ceiling unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right movable ceiling unit from diagonally forward, (C) is the right movable ceiling unit from diagonally behind It is the perspective view seen, (D) is the perspective view which looked at the left movable ceiling unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right and left movable ceiling unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right and left movable ceiling unit for every main structure, and was seen afterwards. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the character unit in a back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the character unit from diagonally behind, (C) is the fixed side relay board of a character unit removed It is a side view shown in the state. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the character unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally forward, (B) is the exploded perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view along the line A in FIG. 177 (C). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 177 (C) with the character body moving to the right side, and (B) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line II in FIG. 177 (C). , (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG. 177 (C). FIG. 181 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the character body in the character unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of (A) as seen from the rear. It is a side view which shows roughly the movable mechanism of the head of the character body in a character unit. It is a top view which shows roughly the movable mechanism of the trunk | drum part of the character body in a character unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the gear decoration body unit in a back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the gear decoration body unit from diagonally behind. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the gear decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward, (B) is the exploded perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. It is a front view which shows a game board in the state which the rotation decoration body, the ceiling decoration body, and the character body moved. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (B) is a flowchart showing the procedure of interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. A pre-judgment table used for the production pre-judgement process. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a table used for the lottery process about a big hit. (B) is a table used in the lottery process for the type of jackpot. The flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. A table used for determination processing for a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening pre-processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the process during big winning opening opening performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning opening opening post-process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. The table used for the determination process about the prefetch notice performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. The table used for the determination process about the prefetch notice performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. An example of an on-hold display area whose display is controlled on a liquid crystal display device.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and below the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards for controlling electrical components, a power board 1136, and the like are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 is provided. It is detachable. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 400 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 10, a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12A, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD. , E-E sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

  8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to this embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Are assembled in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 formed on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right lowered by one step of the connecting member 19. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, the recessed portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The concave portion 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are connected to each other. The main body frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by disengagement.

  Further, the cover reinforcing bracket 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when the cover reinforcing bracket 14 is closed. The front and side surfaces of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support metal 45 and the cover reinforcement metal 14 which also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support flange 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support holes formed in (see FIG. 72) are inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  A hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 is provided on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. Are fastened with fastening screws 32 to fix the upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support fitting 45. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame 12 by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members thereof, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembly strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Further, when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, a lock member 80 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed as shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46. A drooping wall 46a is formed. The drooping wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and when viewed from the front, the lock member 80, which will be described below, cannot be visually recognized to improve the appearance. Then, the lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed to be bent so as to be inclined slightly toward the inside from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

  The hanging wall 46 a described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the entrance end portion in front of the support pothole 47, and the support pothole 47. A stop drooping portion 47a is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion of the front. A mounting hole 46 b is formed in the approximate center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46 b. The lock member 80 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46 a, and the stopper portion 80 a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support rod hole 47.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a, the support hole 47 is formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a that are located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are opposed to each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support rod hole 47. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that it smoothly rotates when the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip end face 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support flange 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protrusion 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support flange 47. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elasticity formed integrally with the synthetic resin. The plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 504 can be prevented from falling off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a of the locking member 80 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 46 (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a Does not rotate in such a direction that it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 47a and disengages further, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80), so Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 81 of the lock member 80 is set to the inside of the support projecting piece 46, the shaft support pin 504 is inclined to the support flange 47 When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the hole, and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. Component force F1 acting on the component (normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since the side only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force is such that the shaft support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the end faces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the abutting portion between the pivot pin 504 and the end faces 80e and 80f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where no rotation occurs or a position where a rotational moment is generated where the lock member 80 rotates its tip end toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a is stopped. Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 80 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a even when the 80 rotates. is doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in a frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), the lock member 80 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 80 c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support rod hole 47. Then, when the pivot pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 47, The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support rod hole 47. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support rod hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 47. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 45, and since it has a very simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 80e, 80f, the shaft supporting pin 504 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 80e and 80f, or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 80c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as seen from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to a lower left decorative board 190 fixed to the lower left side of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and a ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball extraction path cover 191 that closes the ball extraction path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door decoration drive. A door decoration drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring receiving groove 110b formed on the rear side of 110 and capable of receiving wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal board 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which metal sheets are assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 has a plurality of LEDs 190a mounted on the front surface thereof, so that the left end portion of the later-described dish unit 300 can be decorated with light emission. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, such as an electrical component and an electrical component provided on the door frame 5 (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board and the like, speakers 121 and 391). Wiring from the switch, the ball rental unit 301, the operation button unit 370, etc. are connected together and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The main control board 4100 (see FIG. 187) of the main control board box 624 attached to the payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage port 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper part of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later is inserted further closer to the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker lighting unit 120 includes a vertically long lighting unit 122 and a sound unit 130 having a side speaker 121 arranged above and below the lighting unit 122 in the left and right units, respectively. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123, and the side illumination lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover A flash lens 128 having translucency to close the 27 flash openings 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination board 126, and high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. Each white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration board 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on 126 can be irradiated forward through the opening 125 a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  Further, the side electric decoration reflector 124 is formed with a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens from the front side is formed in the lens concave portion 124c. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. The electrical decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit light strongly before the LED 126a emits light by the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that lights only after both ends shine.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker ornament 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker ornament 131 from the rear side. Shaped speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131, holding the speaker cover and having a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in a front view includes a decoration 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic section 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and the head of the player who plays the game is more or less. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left and right positions, so that each side speaker 121 has independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and 2.1ch surround including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on its upper surface, and its lower surface. A lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed. The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 that is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 that are bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes open side outward bent protrusions 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later is attached to the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which a rearward projecting portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flying guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the upright wall 165 is for preventing the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171 a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in accordance with the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose front surface is open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface thereof. In addition, a pair of mounting holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c located substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 31B, only the lower abutment protrusion 110g is shown, and the upper abutment protrusion 110g is not shown).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. It is formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, and on the rear surface wall, two guide projections 182a projecting a predetermined amount rearward and arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction, and disposed below the right side guide projection 182a in rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a in the form of horizontally elongated holes for guiding the movement of the slide body 182; an insertion horizontal hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted; and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is accommodated in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the covering, the screw 182 is screwed into the mounting hole 110f via the mounting hole 184d, so that the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 34A is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view showing (A) from the back. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 34)

  Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a, motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and boards 248 in the top lamp lighting unit 200. , 268, 288, and 296, and LED 453a of a glass unit 450 described later, etc., for relaying and supplying power from a power supply board 1136 (described later). Further, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, LEDs in the central rotating lamp unit 280, motors 245, 265, 285, etc. of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. This is for driving based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface has a shape substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221i that protrudes rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side while the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery thereof. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is inserted through the connector opening 213. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, a board attachment portion 214 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration driving board 206 is attached to the board attachment portion 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of this embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and that is open on the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical part 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined part 221b (see FIG. 33). ). In addition, the reflector base 210 is provided with a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. As shown in the figure, the reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed) Between the cylindrical part 221a and the inclined part 221b, a lens opening part 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially center in the left-right direction. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. Also, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting bosses 211 of the top lamp base 210 and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixing boss 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to a substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a projecting piece 222e projecting in a plate shape from the rear side to the rear side of the diffusion lens part 222d and a lens sheet 223 sandwiched between the upper and lower projecting pieces and on the rear side of the curved lens part 222a. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decorative board 226 is an ultra-bright LED and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens holder 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. Base 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a bottom surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 243, the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 243 is covered with the rotating portion base 242. The rotating part holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and the rotating lamp base gear 243 is coaxially fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 247 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. A mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 247 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotating lamp base 242a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating holder 247 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening portion 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, and has a box shape with the upper part opened, and an opening on a side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp base gear 263 are mounted in parallel with the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided. The attachment step portion 261b rotates from above. The part base 262 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotating lamp base 262a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 267 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 is provided with a substrate supporting part that supports the upper end of the right rotation position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting part 262b of the rotating part base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection substrate 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 262 and the rotation unit holder 267.

  Further, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the drawing, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base part 273a, an opening part 273b drilled in the center of the base part 273a, and a base part 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 has an insertion hole 272a into which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, whereby the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the top opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 273 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotation of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 which is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotating lamp base 282a of the rotating part base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287 are used. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown, the rotating part holder 287 is provided with a substrate supporting part that supports the upper end of the central rotating position detecting substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting part 282b of the rotating part base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the top opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 293 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decoration board 296 to emit light.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the plate unit with the plate back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the plate unit after the plate back plate and the lending unit are removed. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit disassembled from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit board removed, and FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tray unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the tray unit. It is. Moreover, FIG. 63 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long spherical inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. 46 and 47, the dish unit 300 covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open at the top and rear and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-shaped dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310. 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the plate 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 that operates on the tray body 310, an operation button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the tray body 310 and that can be operated by the player depending on the game state (game situation), and a tray unit body 320 below the dish body 310. dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. A handle base 303 to be disposed and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation are mainly provided. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the later-described dish unit main body 320. Further, as shown in the drawing, on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front, a lower left decorative board 190 for emitting and decorating the left end of the dish unit main body 320 is disposed.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) that is arranged between the lending button 301a and the returning button 301b and displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the lending machine. When the ball rental unit 301 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been put in after deducting the remainder of the loaned portion is returned when the return button 301b is pressed. Yes.

  In addition, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when a player participates in game content (game effect) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[1-2C-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage tray 312 to be connected to the storage tray 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is arranged on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340 and is lowered to the right side and the front side in a plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b which is continuous with the rear portion of the first portion and decreases toward the right side and the rear side, and a third inclined surface which is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with the front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and the front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; And a fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between a partition wall 311f where a rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage tray 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It distribute | circulates on the 5 inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e. Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to once detour to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is like that.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a line in the left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. A stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the game balls that are distributed, and the static electricity charged on the game balls is charged. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end thereof is slanted to the lower right and then is dropped downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The flow path is closed at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing down by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish body 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is arranged. A flange portion 316 b that locks the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting port 321d for mounting the handle base 303 at the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e that is disposed above the handle base mounting port 321d and faces a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge opening 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction. I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the speaker opening 322a. A plate-like right cover 323 made of punched metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and four corners cut off, and is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been subjected to plating, a right decoration 325 that is smaller than the right decoration base 324 and disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324, and the main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-like plate made of punching metal and cut off at the four corners corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 A left cover 326, a plate-like left decoration base 327 disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the left cover 326 and having a metallic luster plating surface that is smaller than the left cover 326, and a front surface of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape that decorates the peripheral edges of the left decoration 328 that is smaller and plate-shaped than the left decoration base 327, the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321. The main body 329 is mainly provided. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired, and the through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  The plate unit main body 320 of the present example has a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190, and a front surface of the main body left decoration base 330, and a metallic luster plating on the surface. And a main body left decoration 331 that has been processed. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 190 a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right ornament 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to a metallic luster plating process.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction. An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a that is disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decorating board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is in a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball, a ball supply port 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the ball inlet 341 in a lower right direction and passes in a shape that allows a game ball to pass through, and a rear that communicates with the ball inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the spherical inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is set back by a predetermined amount with respect to the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and through which game balls can be circulated. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the back plate 340 has a ball flow path opening 345 that penetrates in a substantially L shape corresponding to a ball discharge path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390, which will be described later, and a ball flow in the upper left of the ball discharge path opening 345 when viewed from the front. A latch opening 346 that is disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrates in a section shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of the second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted. In addition, the wire insertion port 347 that is arranged in the upper right corner portion when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially section shape and the ball rental unit 301 that is arranged on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inlet 341 and the wire insertion port 346 are attached. A ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351, which are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The lower end of the plate body 311 and supported by the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in the direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the biasing force of the first ball extraction spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355 in the direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage tray 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position where the second ball outlet 312 is closed and an open position where the second ball outlet 312 is opened A second ball-extracting shutter 364, a second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and a second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) that rotatably supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end portion.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing portion 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar portion that extends from the closing portion 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. The second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can pivot about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball removal spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball removal shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the plate 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 that is pivotally supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball removal shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shallow dish shape so that it can show in figure, and the accommodation space which accommodates the 2nd ball removal shutter 364 with the plate body 310 can be formed now. Yes. The height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball and lower, and the second ball removal shutter 364 rotates and the second ball removal port 312 is rotated. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. The game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second projection of the second ball removal slide 362 is pushed by the second ball removal button 361 so that the pair of engagement protrusions 362b in the latch unit 366 are a pair. Contact between the two engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball removal spring 365 is resisted against the biasing force of the second ball removal spring 365. The state where the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in the opened (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of octagonal main buttons 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view and a left base button 372L and a right sub button 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. The sub button 372, the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are slidably held in the vertical direction, and the operation button unit base 373 inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and the operation button unit base 373 A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface and an operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, and a main button housing recess 373a that can house the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the up-down direction to guide the main button 371 in the up-down direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and a sub A pair of sub-button housing recesses 373e capable of housing the button 372 from above and formed on the diagonal upper corner of the long axis A plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall portion 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having an open lower surface by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button receiving recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a has a thick thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and also by the outer peripheral wall of these cylindrical light guide openings 373d. The main button housing recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the main button 371 has an upper end that contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371a and a lower end that contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a in the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be diffused widely, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape similar to that of the main button lens 371, whereas the main button base 371b is a cone whose lower end is narrowed downward from a substantially middle portion in the vertical direction. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inner side of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this example pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The main button sensor 376 detects the operation after entering. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The operation button unit base 373 is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodation recess 373e and the bottom surface of the sub button base 372b and the sub button accommodation recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs down in the front-rear direction across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs down from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. When the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the long axis diagonal line, and through this mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373 The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. In addition, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctioned, The plate body 310 can be easily detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, A box-shaped speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position on the right side of the front surface in the front view and at a position on the rear side of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 is mainly provided. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 due to vibration of the lower speaker 391 It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it has become possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in previous gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball extraction path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball that has been played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by a ball passage cover 191 that closes the ball passage passage opening 110. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotating shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotating operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotating motion of the rotating shaft 415 to a sliding motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. 303a is inserted and fixed. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko machine 1, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. In this way, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410, and the rotation operation is easy without being uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415, and the urging spring 425 always keeps the rotation operation member 414 from the original position. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that conductive plating is applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

  In addition, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and a cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the stored state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanting cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the state described above, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (outer front surface). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  In addition, the wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c is supported on the shaft support side along the lower back side of the door frame 5. And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 62 and FIG. In this example, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage dish 311 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball communication rod 343 of the back plate 340. Thus, the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered, and the game balls that flow into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inflow port 341 follow the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper part of the fifth inclined surface 311e (the right end portion in plan view) while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e Around the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f so as to go around the fifth inclined surface 311e and return to the fourth inclined surface 311d side disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop paying out the game ball, or the game ball launching operation at the ball launcher 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. Can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and a prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 is awarded. When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800 and the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800 is stopped. The ball launching device 650 stops the game ball launching operation. In particular, when the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to dispose the game balls from the storage tray 311 below the tray unit 300. Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is operated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game ball can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes from the ball outlet 321g through the ball outlet 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 62B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 111) is activated and the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball is stopped even though the hitting operation is stopped, and the game may not be continued. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game that is in big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and the game balls on the first inclined surface 311a are almost gone, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b downstream from the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the second ball outlet 312 is intended to flow in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e after being reflected by the outer peripheral wall 311h. A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launch operation of the ball launcher 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inflow port 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state in which the payout of game balls continues, such as during a big hit game state.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. The ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower as viewed in the right direction (sphere supply port 342). Therefore, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball connection rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced to cause clogging of the balls. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62B).

  In addition, the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341 is such that the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage tray 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. It is possible to prevent the lowering of the game balls flowing in from the upper side, and the lower game balls (especially, the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340) are promoted to move in the horizontal direction. Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the storage tray 300 of this example allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the shelf of the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are caused to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game balls in the plate 311 and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 in the front-rear direction substantially center, a terminal plate support portion 451d protruding leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery on the upper side with respect to the vertical center Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decoration board and is supported by the terminal board support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the end of the glass decoration board 453 is fixed to the glass decoration relay terminal board 454. And a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In this glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and back of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can appropriately decorate the light emission between the two glass plates 452 by causing the LEDs 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light appropriately. A pachinko machine 1 having a gaming window 101 (with a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the inner rail 603, but the half on the open side of the post-crime projecting piece 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601. The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the projection piece 472 before the crime prevention and the unit frame 451 The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path portion from hitting the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 75 is a perspective view as seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which the components are attached, and FIG. .

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800 (corresponding to a payout unit of the present invention), a full unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and a game board 4, a board unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except 4, a power supply board 1136, and the like are provided together, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. And a main body frame main body 500 on which various components such as these are mounted.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 71) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side and the front open side that surround the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5. An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by protrusions protruding in parallel to the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and the inner side of the right front opening side side as viewed from the front side. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end, and the left side pivot support side portion on the left side when viewed from the front is the front upper side portion or the front side opening. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front side pivot support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side portion of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side portion of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the back side of the open part of the door frame 5. A bent open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and an open-side inner bent protrusion 154 are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  The above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the most fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where cheating is likely to be performed. Of course, although the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also functions sufficiently, in many cases, the support side is strong. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the distance between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is higher than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, it is not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 for allowing a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a locking device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 to pass through and opened forward, is opened. In addition, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the base 4. As shown in FIG. 67, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 71) is fixed with screws. In addition, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end portion of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 to the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotatably provided around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that protrudes in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 for accommodating a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that is linked to the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is provided at a position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-penetrating opening 521 for projecting the hitting basket 687 of the hitting ball launching apparatus 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle-passing opening 521. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then going downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full unit 900 (see FIG. 71), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear side of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended backward with a step when viewed from the rear side, whereas the left side ( The open side) is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 75) that inclines inwardly from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Further, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that is in contact with the rear side wall and extends rearward from the first side wall 540 substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and accommodates a rearward protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the periphery of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, the open side rear wall 544 is formed on the left side (open side), the top side and the right side (shaft support side) of the fourth side wall 543 from the rear end side when viewed from the back side. An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800, which constitute a ball payout mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to be a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear protruding portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 68) into which a locking projection 1004 described later of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side. A lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. Note that not only the upper and middle portions of the lock device 1000 are attached by screws, but also a screw attachment portion 1003 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008 described later and a lock attachment hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553, 554 and the locking protrusions 749, 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivot support side rear wall 546 on the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. Further, a prize ball guiding projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the shaft support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. In addition, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-like engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with a button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and a rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost bottom surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and the rear side of the shaft support side by the engaging protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The face wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 (see FIGS. 74 and 139), and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in the figure. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. Further, the locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be.

  As described above, the configuration of the main body frame main body 500 including the game board installation recess 510 and the plate portion 511 has been described. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 bent rearward are formed. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 110d with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project. However, the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state which closed the door frame 5, the area | region from the approximate center part of the board part 511 in which the launcher attachment part 520 and the launch rail 515 are arrange | positioned to an open side is the back surface of the door frame 5, and the launcher attachment part. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that the unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 585 as described above is It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side has no portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, and thus the door frame 5 is closed In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protruding piece 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has the space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, which will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the game board of the second embodiment different from the game board shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, cut in the longitudinal direction in the assembled state of the front component member, the game panel, and the panel holder. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc., mainly constituting the game board of the second embodiment, as seen from obliquely in front, and FIG. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board holder for obliquely from behind. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment has a gaming panel 600 formed of a wooden plywood such as a veneer board having a substantially square outer shape and a predetermined thickness, and a front surface of the gaming panel 600. And a function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) fixed to the rear side of the front component member 601. A rear end of the game area 605 is defined.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 82 to 83, the gaming board 4 of the second embodiment includes a transparent plate-like gaming panel 600A, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600A and has a substantially square outer shape, The front component member 601 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600A via the holder 630, and the function display unit 640 is fixed to the front component member 601, and the game panel 600 of the first embodiment is While being divided into a transparent gaming panel 600A and a panel holder 630, the front component member 601 and the function display unit 640 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

  Various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605 on the surface of the game panels 600 and 600A. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after these gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end thereof, and is formed in an oblique shape, and the foul mouth is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Furthermore, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projecting piece 475 protruding from the security cover 470 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  In addition, an out port 606 is provided at the lower center of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guiding passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 474 protruding from the security cover 470 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protruding piece 474, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the open side gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlaps in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when it is pushed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the positioning recess 611 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576, The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Thereafter, the game board fixture 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the gaming board 4 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the gaming board 4 (more precisely, A mounting notch 616 is formed on the front component 601.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3 and the launch of the launch rail 515. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, unauthorized removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  In addition, the game board 4 has an outer shape in which notch portions 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the foul port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided. Further, a function display seal 649 is affixed to the upper side of the lower right certificate sticking part 615 in the front component 601.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various game devices (for example, general winning ports 2004, 2101, starting ports 2001, 2002, grand winning ports 2003, etc.) provided in the gaming area 605 are located downstream. A liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151, etc.) as a display device arranged substantially at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 which can be guided in alignment with A peripheral board box 622 in which the peripheral control board 4140 is stored is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction relatively larger than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of the board holder 623. And a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 for storing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186, a power board 1136, and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component / game panel / panel holder / panel back plate]
Next, the holding structure of the game panel 600A in the game board 4 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, the game board 4 includes a plate-like game panel 600A made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a frame made of a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 600A from the front. -Shaped panel holder 630, and a front structural member that is arranged on the front side of panel holder 630, defines an outer periphery of game area 605, and guides a game ball in game area 605 and guides inner rail 602 and inner rail 603 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although these positioning bosses 601a and positioning projections 601b will be described in detail later, they can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, board board holder 623, and game panel 600A disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 600A in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . The gaming panel 600A is thinner than the panel holder 630 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if a failure nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 600A has a plurality of fitting holes 600a formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 630. In addition, the gaming panel 600A is provided with stepped engagement step portions 600c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 600c has a shape in which approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 600A is cut out, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the gaming panel 600A to the panel holder 630.

  Further, the game panel 600A is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Further, the gaming panel 600A is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with the center accessory 2300, the attacker unit 2000, etc., and for fixing them. These fixing holes are formed at appropriate positions. Note that these openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600A in the vertical and horizontal directions, and since the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600A is connected, the strength of the gaming panel 600A is determined by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600A and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the game panel 600 in the game board 4 of the first embodiment (in this example, , Approximately 20 mm). The panel holder 630 includes a holding step 630a that holds the gaming panel 600A in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step 630a. It mainly includes a through-hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 600A, and the front surface of the gaming panel 600A held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding inner side 630a has a front inner peripheral surface that is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600A. With this clearance C, even if the game panel 600A expands or contracts relatively due to temperature changes or changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600A held by the holding step portion 630a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of protruding pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the game panel 600A are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the gaming panel 600A, the panel holder 630 and the gaming panel 600A can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that are engaged with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600A. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claws 630d are arranged on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 and correspond to the upper engaging step portion 600c in the game panel 600A. The holding step 630a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engagement piece 630e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600A, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. The panel 600A is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 630 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 600c to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600A with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement pieces 630e, the game panel 600A is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630.

  Further, the panel holder 630 includes a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly below the lower side and the outer peripheral edge. Is provided. The mounting support portion 630g causes the rear surface of the panel holder 630 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 154, etc.) of the back box 621 in the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 630g. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 630h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621) formed on a member that is fixedly mounted using the mounting hole 630j. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 630j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole is appropriately sized according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 630j may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 630l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the thinned portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 630l are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is configured to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is formed with a thinned portion 630 l, so that the attachment holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 630. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 630 has a positioning unit 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 on the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 630, an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing back portion 635 are accommodated in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f of the panel holder 630.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 630. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 630b over the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600A in the present example, the gaming panel 600A is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claws 630d and the engaging pieces 630e, By engaging the engaging step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the gaming panel 600A, and the gaming panel 600A and the front side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the gaming panel 600A in the state that the panel holder 630 is held in the conventional obstacle nail planting device without modifying the obstacle nail planting device used more and more. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600A, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc. are determined depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing gaming panel 600A can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front constituent member 601 can be used as common parts. The panel holder 630, the front constituent member 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the gaming panel 600A can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a game board 4 that can be adapted to various types of machines by simply exchanging only.

  Furthermore, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various mounting units such as the rear unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear side of the panel holder 630 according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 630 is designed so as to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 630j, so that the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model. It can be made into parts.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for panel]
Next, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. This board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 or the panel holder 630, and as shown in the figure, is a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and its bottom is in the horizontal direction. It is inclined so as to become lower toward the front at the approximate center so that it can be discharged downward from the approximate center in the left-right direction after receiving the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panels 600 and 600A. It has become. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and beside the main control board box mounting portion 623a (right side in rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is sealed to the horizontal sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 It can be visually confirmed whether or not it has been illegally removed.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a second special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and graphics, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and graphics as special symbols, the first start of the attacker unit 2000 to be described later When a game ball wins in the mouth 2001, the segment indicator SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball wins in the second start port 2002, the segment indicator SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. It has become.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won to the first starting port 2001 is not used in the change display of the special symbol, the first special symbol memory display 643 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the number of the first special symbol held. It is supposed to be. Specifically, when the first special symbol holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and when the first holding symbol is two balls. When both the first special symbol memory display 643 are lit, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is flashed when the holding ball is three balls, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the holding ball is four balls, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit. One special symbol memory display 643 blinks together. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on with the number of the game balls won as the number of reserved special balls. Or it is designed to flash. Specifically, when the first special symbol holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and when the second holding symbol ball is two balls. The second special symbol memory indicator 644 is turned on, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes when the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned on when the number of the holding balls is four. Two special symbol storage indicators 644 blink together.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange colors. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when a game ball passes through a gate 2201 of a gate member 2200 described later, a predetermined normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol fluctuation display is being executed by the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened and closed, the gate is opened. The game symbol that is not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing 2201) is lit with the normal symbol memory display 646 on the basis of the number of game balls passed as the number of reserves. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the color to be lit as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state is a probability variation.

  Further, a 2-round display lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 648a lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the grand prize winning opening 2003 is in the open state from the closed state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 648b lights up and notifies that there are 15 rounds.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol memory display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol memory display 646, a game status display 647, and a round display 648 are allocated to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the gaming state display 647, and the round display 648, segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). A segment display opening 601c is formed in the front component 601 at a position corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, and the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing part 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol variation display by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a start winning is made at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the number of game balls won is set as the number of first special symbols held as the first special symbol. The memory display 643 is turned on or blinks. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644. These second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the number of winning game balls is set as the number of reserved special balls. Two special symbol storage indicators 644 are lit or blinking. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby displaying the variation display of the special symbol by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether the movable piece 2005 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the movable piece 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second start port 2002. It becomes easy to win. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. Stars are printed so as to be distinguished from the game display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, at the positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648, as shown in FIG. 88, the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds, the round indicator 648 is printed with a value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 648a, and a position corresponding to the 15-round display lamp 648b. Is printed with a value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the gaming status indicator 647 notifies the fact that the gaming status is a probability change by displaying the color to be lit as the gaming status, and the two-round display lamp 648a is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is in the opened status from the closed status. The 15-round display lamp 648b lights and notifies that the number of rounds is two. Thus, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL4. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 648a that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 648b which is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be seen by the game status display 647 and the round display 648, respectively.

  In this way, the function display sticker 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed on the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIGS. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from erroneously attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thus, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko machine, the development period of the pachinko machine has been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) when the winning prize opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state are 2 times and 15 times. In addition to adding 5 round display lamps and 8 round display lamps that light up and notify that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, depending on the case of reducing the number of starting ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents to be printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 described above, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. The seal management number 649a can be confirmed by visual observation, and the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hit ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hit ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 93 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a front perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA cross-sectional view (D) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 that gives reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 that applies the biasing force that returns to the initial position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the firing base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at a substantially center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 that is fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. In addition, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an opening 657 for an operating piece is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In the working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 that comes into contact with the mounting piece 660 is provided on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659 so as to be swingable. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the ball striking rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swing piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swing piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner is provided behind the slide member storage space 656 to slide the slide rod 677. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connecting hole 674 is a contact portion 675 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back side thereof, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front side. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and a motor mounting boss 661 that expands forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 which are integrally formed and are housed in the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction and causing the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 to mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the striking ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor contact protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide projecting piece 183 of the joint unit 180 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing the function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92A, the left inner wall is Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. 93, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right direction in FIG. 94) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball striking device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle 410 of the handle device 400 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanted cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the holding position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 183 is not limited. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward a discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. In addition, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodate the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of a sphere at the discharge port portion between the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 97, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge port 730A , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced by the degree of sphere polymerization, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B, resulting in a clogged sphere. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to this embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the related art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail engaging grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted into the rail locking groove 553 from above on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. A hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 that is hooked from above into the rail locking groove 554 is provided in the center. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two paths 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that hang down and flow down the respective passages 742 flow in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. It will be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in one row alternately at the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball path unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball path unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is such that the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825 are deleted, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is drawn in an easy-to-understand manner. It is. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines for easy understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of this example, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front and rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front and rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front and rear bent passage portion 772a. The left and right bent passage portions 772b are bent in the direction (left and right as viewed from the back), and the vertical passage portions 772c communicate with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and have a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 100A, the front / rear bent passage portion 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 described above is the main body. Since it is in a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 of the frame 3 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 to the back surface side, a winning ball guiding projection protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the pivot side rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When the portion 772c no longer has a ball due to clogging or lack of the ball, the ball breakage detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 when the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball passage unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop passage 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in a circular arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 105B). The state shown in FIG. 105 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 105A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Further, the ball that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . The vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  106, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 that covers the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, a prize ball in-unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub-plate 825; And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. The middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball path (bending path 803, prize ball path 810, ball extraction path 811) and is formed within the depth width dimension of the ball path. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere that remains in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 to be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is housed inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in a very close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 to be described later, and is finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is attached to the pivot side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546, and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. 823 is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided with a bar-like detachable button 822 provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the front end of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. Further, the mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface side, and penetrates through the unit sub plate 825. After passing through the hole 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover are held in a state where the unit sub-plate 825 is sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 so as to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. 866.

  The structure of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with the front side of a substantially square shape open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the board cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove part 828 of the relay board area 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw part 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. When the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and drilled in the aluminum heat sink 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is provided above the second gear 844 so as to be rotatable on a shaft 845 that is supported at the other end in the shaft hole 846. A shaft 848 press-fitted into a shaft hole 849 formed in the shaft is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. One end of the rotary shaft 808 is supported by being press-fitted into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801, and the other end is supported by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the region 840, and detected in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. A disk 850 is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with the rotation shaft 808 as a center. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer circumference of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer circumferential portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the concave portions of the sprocket 807 (in the case of illustration). 3) detection cutouts 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. The cover 866 is formed with a mounting hole 867 that is provided at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. Then, the mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are made to engage with the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side and the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. By screwing with a screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in the matched state, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal board 830 in the prize ball unit and a payout control board 1186 described later). A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is housed in a position below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmitting member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 as the disposing member disposed It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844, 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connects the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 is connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front part of the main body frame 3 from the lower relief motor relief opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side from the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824, an engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573 and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed downward while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to do.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball entrance 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released, the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. Then, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are disengaged from each other by moving to the front side, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. For this reason, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed from a prize ball entrance 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 immediately below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the ball in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivotal protrusion 911 when viewed from the front side on the downstream side of the rear surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the number of payouts is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 to be described next when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted to and supported by the shaft projection 911. It has become.

  Further, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of a switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the foul ball passage 922 is bent so that the upstream foul bulb inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul balls taken into the foul mouth 610 are guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  Also, the box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that engage with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. Further, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball that collides with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication bar 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the exit 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. When the number of normal prize balls is about to be paid out, the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong, so that the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock. As shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the tray unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving type full switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after paying out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the sphere flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case in which a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogged balls. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the conventional case because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball with a reduced momentum in the middle of the front guide passage 920 for paying out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. FIG. 123 is a perspective view (B) and (C) of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000, and FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame. Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, the lock device 1000 has a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are prevented from being illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, since the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the side walls 540 and the main body frame 3 are A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be mounted on the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, rectangular hook penetration openings 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass are opened above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001, and on the closed side. A screwing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the upper and middle sides 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed to project from the upper end and middle of (see FIG. 123) and the lower ends of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (Refer to FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. Can be fixed. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, the rivet slots 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively formed at the three upper and lower rivet holes 1050 are formed. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet slots 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 passes through the lower ends of the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment board 1011. The lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It has come to be able to do. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise in FIG. 125B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protrusion 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the protruding piece 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. It is intended to prevent sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 that is fixed to an inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions on one side of the vertical side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040. A guide protrusion 1043 protrudes below 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the raising operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 has a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding motion of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The connection hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connection wire rod 1053. Further, the abutting portion 1067 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is smooth without any backlash. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the locking device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced to close the projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engagement protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push up and raise the door frame sliding rod 1040 against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3, so that the lower side inclined part of the door frame hook part 1041 becomes the hook cover 158. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 also starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the illustrated clockwise direction, and moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hooks 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not closely contacting the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b closely contacting the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view as seen from the front side of the substrate holder for the frame which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing the connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 shows the payout control board and the board unit. of FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

  The board unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIG. 68 and FIG. 70) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIG. 126 and FIG. Various substrates such as a door relay board 1102, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached to a resin-molded frame board holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 1107 and the auxiliary drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 for storing the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 in the present embodiment is particularly shielded as shown in FIGS. 127 and 129 in order to dissipate heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 to the outside (outside air). The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of noise due to electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, malfunction of the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 due to the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as that of the present embodiment between the substrate box located on the lower side and the substrate box located on the upper side.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board recess 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. In addition, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixed with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  Note that a large amount of rearward protrusion is formed from the other end side of the region to which the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. The insertion opening 1115a is inserted into the insertion protrusion 1134 that protrudes above and below the other end side of the power supply board box 1103. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed in the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hung on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are drawn to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball path 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in rows. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed which is spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected. The junction guide hole 1126 and the guide hole 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Insertion guide protrusions 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the attachment hole 527 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection terminal. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power board box 1103 attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with an engagement locking hole 1135 that engages with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, on the portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power line connector 1138, the CR unit power connector 1139, and the ground A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electrical devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The ground connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic ground wires provided in the pachinko machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector to do. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 4150 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and an area with the high step is an attachment area 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the payout control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 1105 together with the above-described delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the payout control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  Further, in the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 132, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are used for various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The information signal is mainly sent from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connection of the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. The The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko machine 1, for example. . The power ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is the power board 1136. The wiring from one ground connector 1140 of the plurality of ground connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal plate 1150b to be relayed are accommodated, and these are conventionally accommodated in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 3, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. Reference will be made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, the caulking and fixing at the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the case of illustration, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4), for example, by inspection or the like. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Accordingly, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146 and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  The dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (the right side in FIG. 132). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  Note that resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are provided in the drawer mounting area 1120 so as to protrude. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by being covered with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed as rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, and 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. For this reason, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, of the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board that is exchanged with the change of the game board 4 is used. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than control board 4100 and liquid crystal control board 4150, power board 1136 housed in power board box 1103, external terminal board 1150 housed in terminal board box 1104, housed in dispensing control board box 1105 The dispense control board 1186 thus assembled is preassembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3 by a simple operation. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of frame 3. It can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 138, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a possibility that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is removed from the main body frame when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wire from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wire from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. Further, the harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed in the approximate center on the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In addition, what is necessary is just to cancel | release engagement with the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engaging groove 785, when releasing.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It performs the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fastened with screws (not shown), so The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 1250 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment, viewed from the back in a state in which the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is attached with the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, and is a perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the present invention is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body. FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a state where the cover body according to the second embodiment is removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the dispensing control board box that comes into contact with the lower side portion of the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 146 shows the second It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, FIG. 143 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and is attached to the door frame 5. The shape of the provided dish unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 569 having a later-described retaining hole 568, locking hole 569a, and guide hole 569b formed on the open end side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 (see FIG. 144); The third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall are different in that the positions of the notches 221 extend downward (see FIG. 140), and the payout control board box 1105 Also in the configuration, the only difference is that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 139 and FIG. 144, the game board 4 is not shown.

  First, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape in which a peripheral wall of a slightly vertically long rectangular shape rises (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality (four in the illustrated case) of pivot pins 1301 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 1302 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly toward the upper portion of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are formed by inserting the shaft support pin 1301 of the cover body 1300 into the cover body supporting cylinder portion 575, thereby making the cover body 1300 the main body. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed and engaging the engagement piece 1302 in the cover body engagement groove 785. The back surface of various components including the main control board box 624 can be protected. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. Since the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 624 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 is connected to a test terminal for testing. The contact operation opening 1303 is provided at a position corresponding to 624b and 624c, and the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape at the upper part of the lower contact side wall 1306 of the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 1304 and an abutment projection 1305 that abut against the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state project from the inside of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the contact protrusion 1305 protrudes relatively low from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303 along the one side opening edge. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the main control board box 624 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 1303.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact. Therefore, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached, as shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 1181a is formed which is formed to be lower than the surface. Accordingly, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box attachment region of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the attachment region 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is not opened by the contact low step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 being covered by the contact lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened near the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is passed through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 in the lock hole 1308. The cylinder lock 1309 has a lock shaft 1311 projecting from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is a screw that is drilled in a lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by passing through the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting and rotating a key (owned by a manager in charge of the game hall) into the cylinder lock 1309. Yes. In addition, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided on the lower portion of the lock hole 1308 so as to project inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 1300 and above and below the engagement piece 1302.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the above-described screw stop hole 1307, lock piece 1313, and guide protrusion 1316. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As described above, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of 567 (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770 sandwiched). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at a lower portion of the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569. A locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the upper and lower sides. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 passes therethrough, and the reinforcing wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b and the lock piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 569a. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and turning it, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 569. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screw holes that match in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) in 1307 and the retaining holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower side on the back side, and the shape is very refreshing. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, the overall thickness is uniform. Since it is easy to grasp, it is easy to load and stack, and even when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, it protrudes from the back of the pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring to be performed. This point also has the same effect as shown in FIG. 3 in the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 1300. It was configured to hold. As a second reason, as described above, since the abutting lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 1105, the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 cannot be particularly opened. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above. However, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has a lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 1306 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only an illegal act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 but also an illegal action on the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Even in the state where the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300. Therefore, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs out of control and recovers. Further, a standing wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection control opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Further, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the back of the pachinko machine 1 that is lined up backwards, It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the top.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 157 first. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front. FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally rear. Further, FIG. 155 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded view for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the oblique rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 157 (A) is a perspective view showing only the attacker unit, the side prize opening member, and the center combination in the game board from an oblique front, and (B) is a perspective view showing (A) from the oblique rear.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control ball 461 as a game ball (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game area 605 is to be driven, and a game panel 600 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 601 and is disposed so as to close the game area 605. A function display unit 640 disposed below the front component 601 outside the game area 605 and to the right of the out port 606, a function display seal 649 affixed to the front of the function display unit 640, and the game area 605 An attacker unit 2000 which is arranged at the approximate center of the left and right direction above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and the attacker unit A side prize opening member 2100 which is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605 on the left side of the game box 605 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and a frame which is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600. Panel lens member that is inserted from the rear side of the game panel into the center-shaped object 2300 having a shape and a plurality of light emitting decoration holes 600f that are formed so as to penetrate the game panel 600, and guides light to the front side of the game panel 600 2500, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and a rear panel 3000 attached to the rear side of the transparent game panel 600 and the center accessory 2300 so as to be visible from the player side. And a liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means capable of displaying an image.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a circular rotating decorative body 3102 disposed on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 at approximately the center in the left-right direction through the frame of the center accessory 2300. A swing-shaped swing ornament 3202 arranged on the rear side and the left and right sides of the rotating ornament 3102, a three-dimensional character body 3402 having a ninja appearance arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 A plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations 3502 arranged on the left side of the upper and lower sides are arranged so as to be visible from the player side. The details of the rotating decorative body 3102, the swing decorative body 3202, the character body 3402, and the gear decorative body 3602 are provided in the back unit 3000, as will be described in detail later. The back unit 3000 includes ceiling decoration bodies 3302 on both the left and right sides of the swing decoration body 3202 and on the front side.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the game board 4, a peripheral substrate box 622 that stores the peripheral substrate 4010 and an inverter substrate box 1410 that stores the inverter substrate 1411 that supplies power to the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided. It has been. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 621 in the back unit 3000 via a lock member 3036.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed in the lower part of the center of the game panel 600 in the left-right direction, and is then placed on the front of the game panel 600. It is fixed. This attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2000 is arranged at substantially the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2001, the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001, and the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002. It has a section-shaped large winning opening 2003 that greatly extends in the left-right direction, and a general winning opening 2004 arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2003.

  The first start port 2001 of the attacker unit 2000 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). The game balls received in the first starting port 2001 are discharged downward after being detected by a first starting port sensor 3022 provided in the right guiding member 3018 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2005 that can be expanded by a start-up solenoid 2010 is disposed between the second start-up port 2002 disposed below the first start-up port 2001 and the first start-up port 2001. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2005 rises substantially vertically, the first starting port 2001 and the pair of movable pieces 2005 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2002, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2005 In a state where 2005 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received at the second start port 2002. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2005. The pair of movable pieces 2005 are configured to be opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2010 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later. The game ball received in the second starter port 2002 is detected by a second starter port sensor 2012 provided in the attacker unit 2000 and then discharged downward.

  Further, the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2003 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is rotated, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that a game ball can be received. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2003 is detected by a count sensor 2014 provided in the attacker unit 2000 and then discharged downward. Further, the opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a lottery is performed when a game ball is received (start winning prize) into the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002. According to the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit”), the attacker solenoid 2016 is driven to open and close.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the general winning opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times. The game ball received in the left general winning opening 2004 in the attacker unit 2000 is detected by a general winning opening sensor 3020 provided in the left guiding member 3016 of the back unit 3000 described later, and then discharged downward. It has become. Further, the game balls received in the right general winning opening 2004 are detected by a general winning opening sensor 3020 provided in the right guiding member 3018 of the back unit 3000 described later, and then discharged downward. .

[2-2. Side prize opening member]
In addition, the side prize port member 2100 in the game board 4 is a lower part of the game panel 600 that is located on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and an opening 600e that is formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed. After being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 and faces away from each other along the outer periphery of the game area 605 so as to line up with the general winning port 2004 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 when viewed from the front. Two general winning openings 2101 are provided. As shown in the drawing, these two general winning ports 2101 are opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  In addition, the side prize opening member 2100 is arranged at a position such that the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 605 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2100 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2102 and the first shelf portion 2102 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with the two general winning holes 2101 sandwiched therebetween, and the game area 605 in the left-right direction center side (the second start opening 2002 of the attacker unit 2000 or the big prize) A second shelf 2103 that is lowered toward the mouth 2003 side), and the first shelf 2102 brings the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 605 toward the center of the game area 605. Can be done.

  Note that the two general winning ports 2101 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf 2102, and even if the game ball is brought closer to the center side of the game area 605 by the shelf 2102, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the mouth 2102. A third shelf 2104 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 605 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning ports 2101.

  The side prize port member 2100 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole. A side prize port decoration board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2103, and A side lamp decoration board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side, and the side prize opening member 2100 can be decorated with light emission by these side prize opening decoration board and the side lamp decoration board 3014. .

[2-3. Center character]
In addition, the center accessory 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent game panel 600, and is then placed on the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is between the outer diameter of the game area 605 and the outer diameter of the game ball. Are formed in an arc shape so that a slightly larger gap is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 605. Has been.

  The center accessory 2300 includes a flange portion 2300a formed in a thin frame shape that contacts the front surface of the game panel 600, and an insertion wall portion that extends from the flange portion 2300a into the opening portion 600e of the game panel 600. 2300b and a front wall portion 2300c protruding forward from the flange portion 2300a. On the front wall portion 2300c of the center accessory 2300, an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left direction is formed on the left side from a position slightly on the right side in the left-right direction center on the upper outer peripheral surface, When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and also flows (enters) to the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game balls flow down to the lower part of the game area 605 through the right side of the center bonus 2300. That is, when a game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a random game.

  The center accessory 2300 has a warp inlet 2302 that allows a game ball flowing down the game area 605 to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall 2300b, and a warp that detects the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2302 An entry detection sensor 2302a, a warp outlet 2303 that releases a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2302 into the frame, and a game on the upper side of the attacker unit 200 after rolling the game ball released from the warp outlet 2303 in the horizontal direction A stage 2310 which is discharged into the region 605 and formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the insertion wall 2300b. The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2311 to which the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2303 is supplied, and the game ball is supplied from the first stage 2311. A second stage 2312 capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 605. When the warp entry detection sensor 2302a detects a game ball, a detection signal is output to the peripheral control board 4140, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a monitors the input of the detection signal so that the game into the warp inlet 2302 is detected. Detecting the entry of a ball.

  The first stage 2311 and the second stage 2312 are formed in curved surfaces such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center of the first stage 2311 in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is formed on the flange portion 2300a of the center accessory 2300. It is discharged into the game area 605 from the chance exit 2314 on the lower front surface. As shown in the figure, the chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2000, and the game balls released from the chance exit 2314 are accepted into the first start opening 2001 with high probability. (Wins).

  It should be noted that the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 of this example is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, a lower decorative body 3010 of a back unit 3000 described later can be viewed from the player side. .

  Further, the center accessory 2300 further includes a transparent arch portion 2315 extending leftward so as to substantially contact the inner rail 603 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion 2300b and above the warp inlet 2302. Yes. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion 2300b, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 600. As a result, the game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 605 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch part 2315.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion 2300b. The gate portion 2350 includes a gate entrance that is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion 2300b and is located above the arch portion 2315 so that a game ball flowing down the game area 605 can enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. A gate sensor 2352 to be detected, and a gate outlet 2353 for discharging the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion 2300b to the game area 605 are provided. In this example, the gate outlet 2535 of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 is as if the arch portion 2315 has dived. It can be seen.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a circular opening window 2316 at the substantially right and left center on the right side of the upper shelf 2301, and a rotating decorative body 3102 of the back unit 3000 described later can be desired from the opening window 2316. It has become.

[2-4. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example penetrates in the front-rear direction in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 600e into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 605 of the game panel 600. The plurality of light emission decoration holes 600f formed in the light emission decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to the plurality of light emitting decoration holes 600f formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panel lens members 2500 disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. The upper panel lens substrate 2512 on which the LEDs are mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to the plurality of light emitting decoration holes 600f formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the rear side of the lower panel lens 2520 And a lower panel lens substrate 2522 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface thereof.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 have substantially the same shape as the plate-shaped lens base portion 2501 and the light emitting decoration hole 600f that protrudes forward from the lens base portion 2501 and is inserted. A plurality of insertion light guides 2502. The insertion light guide portion 2502 of the upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 is inserted in the light emitting decoration hole 600f of the game panel 600 from the rear side so that the front ends thereof substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 600. It is formed so as not to affect the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game panel 600 as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 of this example emits light in the area where the game ball flows even when an opaque game panel 600 such as a veneer plywood is used by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate 2512 and the lower panel lens substrate 2522. It is possible to decorate the game panel 600 that has never been seen before, and to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out so as to differentiate it from other pachinko machines.

[2-5. Back unit]
Next, a detailed configuration of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 185. FIG. 158 (A) is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and (B) is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from obliquely behind. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the oblique rear. is there. FIG. 161 (A) is a perspective view of the upper unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 161 (B) is a perspective view of the upper unit as seen from an oblique rear. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the upper unit in the rear unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the upper unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the oblique rear. It is. FIG. 164A is a front view of the rotating decorative body unit in the upper unit, FIG. 164B is a perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG.

  FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the upper unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely. FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary decorative unit in each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rotating decorative body that is movable by rotation in the rotating decorative body unit. 168 is a front view schematically showing an elevating mechanism for elevating and lowering the rotary decoration unit in the upper unit, FIG. 169 (A) is a rear view of the elevating mechanism in FIG. 168, and (B) is an elevating mechanism in (A). It is a rear view in which an upper unit cover is added to the mechanism. FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lifting mechanism in the upper unit. FIG. 171 (A) is a perspective view showing the swing decorative body unit in the upper unit obliquely from the front, FIG. 171 (B) is a perspective view showing the swing decorative body unit from the rear, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dynamic decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (B) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the swing decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen afterwards FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the swing decorative body unit.

  Further, FIG. 174 (A) is a perspective view of the left movable ceiling unit as viewed from an oblique front, (B) is a perspective view of the right movable ceiling unit as viewed from an oblique front, and (C) is a right movable ceiling unit. Is a perspective view of the left movable ceiling unit as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the left and right movable ceiling units disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the left and right movable ceiling units separated for each main configuration. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 177 (A) is a perspective view of the character unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, (B) is a perspective view of the character unit as viewed from obliquely behind, and (C) is a fixed-side relay board of the character unit. It is a side view shown in the state which removed. FIG. 178 (A) is an exploded perspective view in which the character unit is disassembled into main components and viewed obliquely from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view in which (A) is viewed from the oblique rear. 179 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 177 (C), and FIG. 180 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the easy line in FIG. 177 (C) with the character body moving to the right. B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 177 (C), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG. 177 (C).

  FIG. 181A is an exploded perspective view of the character body in the character unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 181B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. . FIG. 182 is a side view schematically showing the movable mechanism of the head of the character body in the character unit, and FIG. 183 is a plan view schematically showing the movable mechanism of the body of the character body in the character unit. FIG. 184 (A) is a perspective view of the gear decoration body unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, and (B) is a perspective view of the gear decoration body unit as seen from an oblique rear. FIG. 185 (A) is an exploded perspective view in which the gear decoration body unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view in which (A) is viewed from the oblique rear. Further, FIG. 188 is a front view showing the game board in a state where the rotating decorative body, the ceiling decorative body, and the character body are movable.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment is arranged and fixed on the rear side of the game panel 600, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance as shown in the figure. A back box 621, an upper unit 3002 disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621, a character unit 3400 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621, and the back box 621 The gear decoration body unit 3500 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is mainly provided.

  The back unit 3000 includes a shelf-like lower decorative body 3010 disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621 and below the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300, and the front side of the lower decorative body 3010. In addition, the lower stage decorative substrate 3012, which is disposed in the center in the left-right direction and is disposed immediately below the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300, and on the surface of which the LED for lighting decoration from the lower side is mounted, and the back box 621 A side lamp decoration board 3014 is provided at a position corresponding to the side prize opening member 2100 attached to the game panel 600 in the vicinity of the lower left front end, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower front end of the back box 621 and has a game ball received in the general winning port 2101 of the side winning port member 2100 and a game received in the left general winning port 2004 in the attacker unit 2000. A left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a game ball that is disposed on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and received in the first start port 2001 and the right general winning port 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 is guided downward. A right guide member 3018. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning port 2101 of the side winning port member 2100 and the general winning port 2004 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 downward through different flow paths. The general winning opening sensor 3020 for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guide member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received at the first start port 2001 and the right general winning port 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 through different flow paths to the lower end. The first start port sensor 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the first start port 2001, and the general winning port sensor 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the right general winning port 2004. Further, the right guide member is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box 3030 which is disposed at the lower rear side of the back box 621 and accommodates the lamp drive board, and a lamp drive board box 3030 which is fixed to the rear side of the back box 621. A panel relay terminal plate 3032 arranged on the left side in the rear view, a horizontally-long rectangular upper resistance substrate 3034 arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 621, and a liquid crystal display device 1400 attached to the rear side of the back box 621 And a lock member 3036 that is detachably held.

  As shown in the figure, the back box 621 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 621a protruding outward at the front end. This is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 through the. Further, the back box 621 has a rectangular opening 621c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 621b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side through the opening 621c can be viewed from the player side. Yes. Further, the back box 621 is provided with mounting portions at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing the units 3002, 3400, 3600, the substrates 3012, 3014, 3032, 3034 and the like.

  In addition, the back box 621 includes a liquid crystal support portion on the right side of the opening 621c when viewed from the back, and for inserting and locking one fixing piece 1402 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (right side when viewed from the back). In addition, a lock member 3036 is attached to the left side of the opening 621c in the rear view, and the other fixing piece 1402 (left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is supported by the lock member 3036. 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 621.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the back box 621 includes two triangular protective pieces 621d extending inward from the inner periphery on the right side in a rectangular opening 621c when viewed from the front. A character unit 2400, which will be described later, is disposed on the front surface of the protective piece 621d. When the right arm portion 2402c is reciprocated in a substantially horizontal direction by the body portion moving mechanism 2470 of the character unit 2400, the inertial force or the like is used. The character unit 2400 can be prevented from coming into contact with the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the occurrence of problems in the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the character unit 3400 can be avoided.

  A panel relay terminal board 3032 attached to the rear side of the back box 621 relays connection between a peripheral control board 4140 and a main control board 4100 described later. Further, the panel relay terminal plate 3032 includes a main control board 4100, a magnetic detection sensor 3024, a count sensor 2014, a general prize opening sensor 3020, a gate sensor 2352, a start opening solenoid 2010, an attacker solenoid 2016, and a function display board 640a. It also relays the connection.

  A lamp driving board 3031 is accommodated in the lamp driving board box 3030 attached to the rear side of the back box 621. The lamp driving board 3031 drives the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3012, 3014, 3124, 3214, 3216, 3320, 3328, 3432, 3456, 3482, 3526, 3530 provided in the game board 4. is there. Further, the lamp driving board 3031 is provided in the door frame 5 in addition to driving motors 3106, 3160, 3212, 3312, 3418, 3472, 3514 and solenoids 3127, 3455 for driving each decorative body of the back unit 3000 described later. The left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200 are driven. Note that the lamp driving substrate 3031 is connected to an upper resistance substrate 3034 in which resistors that generate heat are combined.

[2-5A. Overall configuration of upper unit]
As shown in FIG. 161 and the like, the upper unit 3002 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a horizontally long shape and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening 621c in the back box 621. The upper unit 3002 is disposed on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and has a circular rotational decoration body unit 3100 in front view, and an elevating mechanism 3150 that is disposed on the rear side of the rotational decoration body unit 3100 and moves the rotational body unit 3100 up and down. An upper unit cover 3004 that supports the elevating mechanism 3150, a swing ornament body unit 3200 disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the upper unit cover 3004, and upper portions on both the left and right sides of the swing ornament body unit 3200. A movable ceiling unit 3300 disposed on the rear side of the unit cover 3004, and an upper unit cover 3004, a rocking decoration body unit 3200, and a movable ceiling disposed on the rear side of the movable ceiling unit 3300 and the rocking decoration body unit 3200. An upper unit base 3006 that supports the unit 3300; It is provided.

  The upper unit 3002 is arranged at a position corresponding to between the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and the inner periphery (inside the frame) of the frame-shaped center accessory 2300 in front view, as shown in FIG. In a normal state, a part of the rotating decorative body 3102 and a lower part of the swing-shaped swinging decorative body 3202 can be seen from the opening window 2316 of the center accessory 2300, and a position that is difficult to see from the player side (also referred to as an arrangement range). ).

  The upper unit 3002 can move up and down the rotating decorative body unit 3100 disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface. When in the raised position, the rotating decorative body 3102 of the rotary decorative body unit 3100 serves as a center role. It faces the player side from the opening window 2316 of the object 2300. In addition, when the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is in the lowered position, the approximately center in the left-right direction of the upper unit cover 3004 is visible from the player side through the opening window 2316 of the center accessory 2300 (see FIG. 186). The upper unit cover 3004 arranged on the rear side is decorated with light emission by an upper unit rear decoration board 3214 attached to the front surface of a cover member 3210 in a swing decorative body unit 3200 to be described later.

[2-5A-1. Rotating decorative body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 164 to 167, the rotary ornament body unit 3100 in the upper unit 3002 includes four rotary ornament bodies 3102 that are arranged in a predetermined circle and are divided into four shuriken shapes by four. By rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3102 around a predetermined rotation axis, each of the rotating decorative bodies 3102 moves away from the rotation axis, that is, protrudes from a predetermined circle, and widens greatly as a whole. It can be rotated in such a state. More specifically, a shallow cylindrical rotating decorative body unit base 3104 supported by the elevating mechanism 3150 and extending in the front-rear direction and closed at the rear end, and the rotating decorative body unit base 3104 on the rear side of the rotating decorative body unit base 3140 A rotary decorative body drive motor 3106 disposed at a predetermined position eccentric from the central axis, a drive gear 3108 that is rotationally driven by the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, meshed with the drive gear 3108, and substantially coaxial with the rotary decorative body unit base 3104 A driven gear 3110 disposed above, and a first rotating member 3112 having a disk-shaped rotating surface 3112a that rotates together with the driven gear 3110 and extends in the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis in the vicinity of the front end of the rotating decorative unit base 3104; , A ring-shaped first supported on the outer periphery of the first rotating member 3112 so as to be relatively rotatable on the same axis. A rotary member 3114 includes a four rotary decorative body 3012 are respectively supported on the front side of the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114.

  As shown in the drawing, four rotary shafts 3116 arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction and extending forward are held on the second rotary member 3114 in the rotary decorative body unit 3100. . On the other hand, in the first rotating member 3112, as shown in the figure, four holes are arranged on the disk-shaped rotating surface 3112 a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction and extend in a predetermined direction on a line that does not pass through the rotating shaft. A portion 3112b is formed. A second shaft member 3118 that can rotate forward is supported on the guide portion 3112b of the first rotating member 3112 via a bush that is slidable in the elongated hole. Further, the first rotating member 3112 is provided with a plurality of rollers 3112c at predetermined intervals near the outer periphery and the outer edge of the front surface. When the rollers 3112c come into contact with the second rotating member 3114, the second rotating member 3114 can be supported so as to be relatively rotatable.

  The rotating decorative bodies 3102 are supported at the tips of the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 held by the second rotating member 3114 and the first rotating member 3112. Specifically, one rotating decorative body 3102 is supported by a pair of a first shaft member 3116 and a second shaft member 3118, and a first rotating member 3112 (second rotation member) is provided on the first shaft member 3116 side. The position in the radial direction with respect to the rotation axis of the member 3114) does not change, and the second shaft member 3118 has a radius with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotation member 3112 by sliding the guide portion 3112b. The position of the direction changes. As a result, the rotational decoration body 3102 rotates about the first shaft member 3116 by changing the position of the second shaft member 3118, and a part of the rotation decoration body 3102 is rotated more than the outer periphery. It can protrude outward.

  The rotating ornament body unit 3100 is disposed on the rear side of the disk-shaped rotating surface 3112a of the first rotating member 3112, and is fixed to the second rotating member 3114 in a ring shape having substantially the same diameter as the second rotating member 3114. The rotation holding member 3120 is further provided, and the rotation surface 3112a of the first rotation member 3122 is disposed between the second rotation member 3114 and the rotation holding member 3120, so that the second rotation member 3114 moves in the front-rear direction. The movement can be restricted. As shown in the figure, the second rotation member 3114 and the rotation holding member 3120 are provided with notch-shaped lock portions 3114a and 3120a, respectively, at predetermined positions in the circumferential direction. In addition, a cutout portion 3104 a extending in the front-rear direction with a width corresponding to the lock portions 3114 a and 3120 a of the second rotation member 3114 and the rotation holding member 3120 is formed on the upper portion of the rotary ornament body unit base 3104.

  Further, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is arranged on the rear side of the rotation holding member and has a substrate support member 3122 having a substantially rectangular opening 3122a, and is fixed to the rear side of the substrate support member 3122 and is moved forward from the opening 3122a. And a rotating decorative body decorative board 3124 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. In this example, the rotating decorative body 3102, the first rotating member 3112, the second rotating member 3114, and the like are formed so as to have translucency, and the rotating decorative body 3102 and the like rotated by the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3124 are used. It can be decorated with light emission. The first rotating member 3112, the second rotating member 3114, the rotation holding member 3120, the substrate support member 3122, and the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3124 are accommodated in the cylindrical rotating decorative body unit base 3104. ing.

  The rotating ornament body unit 3100 is provided with a rotation lock mechanism 3126 that locks the rotation of the second rotating member 3114 at the upper rear side of the rotating ornament body unit base 3104. In the rotation lock mechanism 3126, a lock solenoid 3127 whose plunger can be advanced and retracted upward, and a lock piece 3128a that can be fitted to the lock portion 3114a of the second rotation member 3114 by the drive of the lock solenoid 3127 can be moved up and down. And a locking member 3128. In the rotation lock mechanism 3126, when the plunger of the lock solenoid 3127 is raised, the lock piece 3128a of the lock member 3128 is lowered, and when the plunger is lowered, the lock piece 3128a is raised, and the lock piece 3128a is lowered. When the second rotating member 3114 is fitted and inserted into the lock portion 3114a of the second rotating member 3114, the rotation of the second rotating member 3114 is locked. The plunger of the lock solenoid 3127 is urged in the upward direction by a coil spring, and the plunger is lowered when energized, and the lock piece 3128a is lowered (normally (non-energized)) ( Locked state).

  Further, the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the rotary ornament body unit base 3104, and houses the drive gear 3108, the driven gear 3110, the lock solenoid 3127 of the lock mechanism 3126, etc. on the front side, and the rotary ornament body on the rear side. The gear box 3130 to which the drive motor 3106 is fixed, the wiring cover 3132 fixed to the upper side of the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106 on the rear side of the gear box 3130, and the rotational position of the rotary decorative body 3102 (first rotary member 3112) And a rotational position detection sensor 3134 for detecting. In this example, as shown in the figure, the driven gear 3110 is provided with a detection piece 3110a protruding outward, and the rotation position of the rotary decorative body 3102 is detected by detecting the detection piece 3110a with the rotation position detection sensor 3134. It can be detected.

  Further, the rotary ornament body unit 3100 includes a pair of support portions 3104b on the rear side of the rotary ornament body unit base 3104, at the approximate center in the vertical direction and near both left and right ends. Support pins 3136 extending rearward are attached to the support portions 3104b in a non-rotatable state, and each support pin 3136 has a large-diameter flange 3138a on one end side. The two support bushes 3138 are rotatably inserted so that the respective flange portions 3138a are oriented away from each other. Further, an E-ring is attached to the front end (rear end) of the support pin 3136, and the E-ring prevents the support bush 3138 from coming off from the support pin 3136 (see FIG. 164 and the like).

  The support pins 3136 fixed to the pair of support portions 3104b and the two support bushes 3138 inserted into the support pins 3136 are configured such that the cylindrical portions of the two support bushes 3138 are two slide members 3152 in the lifting mechanism 3150 described later. In this state, the support pins 3136 are supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the unit support holes 3152a and slidable in the direction in which the long holes extend. Accordingly, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is supported on one end side of the two slide members 3152 in the lifting mechanism 3150.

  Note that the rotating decorative body unit 3100 of the present example has a diameter of the second rotating member 3114 (rotating decorative body unit base 3104) that is substantially half the vertical dimension of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the rotating decorative body. The rotation diameter when the 3102 rotates and protrudes outward is about 2/3 of the vertical dimension of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The rotating decorative body 3102 has a plurality of through-openings that match the decoration on the surface, and is provided with a silver gloss plating layer on the entire surface. On the other hand, the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114 are substantially colorless and transparent, and from the rotating decorative body decoration substrate 3124 disposed on the rear side by a fine relief-like decoration formed on the surface. Light can be irregularly refracted and the rotating decorative body decoration substrate 3124 can be made difficult to see from the player side. Note that the front surface of the rotating decorative body decoration board 3124 is white, and it is difficult to recognize from the player side through the first rotating member 3112 and the like.

  Next, the movement of the rotating decorative body 3102 in the rotating decorative body unit 3100 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, in a normal state, the lock piece 3128a of the rotation lock mechanism 3126 is fitted and inserted into the lock portion 3114a of the second rotation member 3114, and the second rotation member 3114 and the first rotation member 3112 are in the first state. The rotating decorative body 3102 is connected via the shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118, and even if the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 is driven to rotate in this state, the first rotating member 3112 does not rotate. Yes.

  In this state, when the lock solenoid 3127 of the rotation lock mechanism 3126 is driven to raise the lock piece 3128a, the lock piece 3128a is removed from the lock portion 3114a of the second rotation member 3114, and the rotation lock is released. Thereafter, the first rotating member 3122 is driven to rotate by the rotating decorative body driving motor 3106 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 167 (A)). Then, as the first rotating member 3112 rotates, the second rotating member 3114 also rotates counterclockwise, and a centrifugal force acts on each rotating decorative body 3102.

  Then, due to the centrifugal force acting on the rotating decorative body 3102, the rotating decorative body 3102 attempts to move outward from the rotation axis, but the first shaft member 3116 that supports the rotating decorative body 3102 is attached to the second rotating member 3114. On the other hand, the position is relatively fixed, and the first shaft member 3116 side does not move radially outward. On the other hand, the second shaft member 3118 extends along the guide portion 3112b extending on the rotation surface 3112a of the first rotation member 3112 so as to approach the first shaft member 3116 that becomes a pair as it goes outward in the radial direction of the rotation shaft. It is slidable and tries to move away from the rotation axis by the centrifugal force acting.

  However, since the distance between the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 does not change, the first shaft member 3116 is supported in order to maintain the distance when the second shaft member 3118 moves away. The second rotating member 3114 that can rotate relative to the first rotating member 3112 relatively rotates (further rotates counterclockwise), so that the second shaft member 3118 slides along the guide portion 3112b. It becomes possible to do. When the second shaft member 3118 moves in the direction in which the rotation axis moves away, the rotating decorative body 3102 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the first shaft member 3116, and the blade of the rotating decorative body 3102 The protruding portion protrudes from the outer periphery of the second rotating member 3114 (rotating decorative body unit base 3104) (see FIG. 167B).

  When the second shaft member 3118 reaches the end of the guide portion 3112b that is away from the rotation axis, the second shaft member 3118 cannot slide any further. The movement stops, and in this state, the four rotating decorative bodies 3102, the first rotating member 3112, and the second rotating member 3114 continue to rotate (see FIG. 167 (C)).

  On the other hand, when the rotation of the rotating decorative body 3102 is stopped, while the rotational driving of the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 is maintained, the driving of the rotation lock mechanism 3126 and the lock solenoid 3127 is stopped, and the rotation is stopped by the urging force of the coil spring. The piece 3128a is biased in the descending direction. At this time, when the lower end of the lock piece 3128a comes into contact with the outer periphery of the second rotation member 3114 and the second rotation member 3114 rotates and the lock portion 3114a reaches the upper end (at the position of the lock piece 3128a), the lock piece 3128a Is fitted into the lock portion 3114a of the second rotating member 3114, and the rotation of the second rotating member 3114 is locked by the lock piece 3128a and stopped (see FIG. 167 (D)).

  Even in a state where the rotation of the second rotating member 3114 is locked, the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 is driven to rotate, and the first rotating member 3112 attempts to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the second shaft member 3118 tends to approach the first shaft member 3116 by the rotation of the first rotating member 3112 with respect to the first shaft member 3116 supported by the second rotating member 3114 that is made non-rotatable. As described above, since the distance between the pair of the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 that supports the rotating decorative body 3102 does not change, the second shaft member 3118 is maintained in order to maintain these distances. Moves along the guide 3112b in a direction approaching the rotation axis. As a result, the rotating decorative body 3102 rotates clockwise around the first shaft member 3116, and the portion protruding from the outer periphery of the second rotating member 3114 moves toward the inner periphery side ( (See FIG. 167 (E)).

  When the second shaft member 3118 reaches the end portion of the guide member 3112b that is close to the rotation axis, the second shaft member 3118 cannot slide any more. The rotation of the first rotating member 3102 is prevented through the decorative body 3102 and the second shaft member 3118, the rotation of the first rotating member 3112 is stopped, and the protrusions of the four rotating decorative bodies 3102 are stored, and the initial state After that, the rotational drive of the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106 is stopped.

  As described above, according to the rotating decorative body unit 3100 of this example, the rotating decorative body 3102 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction. Can be greatly changed, it can have a strong impact on the player, it can entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating, and also attract the player's interest strongly The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines.

[2-5A-2. Elevating mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 162, FIG. 168, and the like, an elevating mechanism 3150 for elevating the rotating decorative body unit 3100 in the upper unit 3002 is slidably supported on the front surface of the upper unit cover 3004, and vertically A pair of transparent, arcuate slide members 3152 arranged symmetrically with respect to the moving axis extending in the direction, and abutting rotatably on the inner peripheral side surface of the slide member 3152 and along the inner peripheral side surface Corresponding to the distance between the two first slide holding members 3154 and the two first slide holding members 3154, which are arranged apart from each other by a predetermined distance and prevent the slide member 3152 from moving toward the inner peripheral side (center direction). One second slide holding member which is disposed at a position and prevents the slide member 3152 from moving outward in the central direction and the radial direction And 156, a mainly provided.

  The first slide holding member 3154 and the second slide holding member 3156 each include a pin that is fixed to the upper unit cover 3004 and a bush that is rotatably inserted into the pin, and the outer periphery of the bush is a slide member 3152. The first slide holding member 3154 and the second slide holding member 3156 allow the slide member 3152 to move (slide) along the arcuate slide axis. . More specifically, the arc-shaped slide axis is centered so that the center is located on the lower side in the arrangement range between the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and the inner periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2300 in front view. It is an arcuate axis that extends toward the approximate center of the game area 605 on the inner peripheral side of the accessory 2300. The slide member 2352 is formed in an arc shape having a substantially constant width along the slide axis.

  The slide member 3152 in the elevating mechanism 3150 includes an elongated unit support hole 3152a that extends long in a direction intersecting the slide axis on one end side close to each other (side near the center in the left-right direction), and a side surface on the outer peripheral side. A rack gear 3152b having a plurality of teeth arranged along the axis, a slit 3152c extending in an arc along the slide axis, and a rearward projecting from the rear surface of the slide member 3152 and extending in an arc along the base end of the rack gear 3152b A shelf-shaped detector 3152d is mainly provided. As illustrated, the second slide holding member 3156 is inserted into the slit 3152 c of the slide member 3152.

  By inserting the support pin 3136 and the support bush 3138 of the rotary ornament body unit 3100 into the unit support hole 3152a of the slide member 3152, the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is supported at a substantially central position in the left-right direction by the two slide members 3152. (See FIG. 169 (A) and the like).

  The elevating mechanism 3150 is disposed on an axis that passes through the first slide holding member 3154 disposed outside the center in the left-right direction and extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the arcuate slide axis, and the rack gear 3152b of the slide member 3152 The meshing pinion gear 3158, the lifting drive motor 3160 fixed to the rear side of the upper unit cover 3004 by rotating the pinion gear 3158, the abutting portion 3162a capable of abutting on the detecting portion 3152d of the slide member 3152, and A detection member 3162 having a fan-shaped detection piece 3162b and pivotally supported by the upper unit cover 3004 between the contact portion 3162a and the detection piece 3162b, and the detection piece 3162b of the detection member 3162 can be detected. An elevation detection sensor 3164 fixed to the upper unit cover 3004; It has to.

  The detection member 3162 is biased so that the contact portion 3162a faces the center of the arcuate slide axis by a predetermined biasing means, and the contact portion 3162a is in contact with the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152. When the detection piece 3162b rotates to a position that can be detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164 and the contact portion 3162a contacts the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152, the detection piece 3162b cannot be detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164. (See FIG. 170).

  The elevating mechanism 3150 further includes a holding magnet 3166 attached to the lower end of the upper unit cover 3004 at the substantially center in the left-right direction so that the lower surface faces downward. The holding magnet 3166 is magnetically attached to the motor case of the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106 when the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is in the raised position, so that the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is interposed via the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106. Can be held in the raised position.

  Further, the elevating mechanism 3150 is disposed on an axis that passes through the first slide holding member 3154 disposed near the center in the left-right direction and extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the arc-shaped slide axis, and detects the shelf in the slide member 3152. A third slide holding member 3168 that rotatably contacts the upper surface of the portion 3152d, the first slide holding member 3154, the second slide holding member 3156, the third slide holding member 3168, and the front end of the pinion gear 3158 are pivotally supported. And a cover member 3170 (see FIG. 161 and the like) that is fixed to the upper unit cover 3004 and covers a part of the slide member 3152 and the pinion gear 3158 from the front side. Similar to the first slide holding member 3154 and the second slide holding member 3156, the third slide holding member 3168 includes a pin fixed to the upper unit cover 3004 and a bush inserted rotatably with respect to the pin. The outer periphery of the bush comes into contact with the upper surface of the detection unit 3152d.

  Next, the movement of the lifting mechanism 3150 in the upper unit 3100 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 170 (A), the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is located at the ascending position, and in this state, the two slide members 3152 in the elevating mechanism 3150 are the rotary ornament body unit. The other end side that does not support 3100 is positioned away from each other, and the one end side that supports the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is raised to a position that is substantially the same height as the central lower end of the upper unit cover 3004. As a result, the two slide members 3152 are located within the arrangement range between the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and the inner periphery of the center accessory 2300, and are hardly visible from the player side (see FIG. 151).

  Since the lifting mechanism 3150 supports the rotating ornament body unit 3100 on one end side of the slide member 3152 and does not support anything on the other end side, the lifting mechanism 3150 always moves downward on one end side due to the weight of the rotating ornament unit 3100. A force to move is applied, and the lifting drive motor 3160 that rotates the pinion gear 3158 meshed with the rack gear 3152b acts as a resistance to maintain the rotating decorative body unit 3100 in the raised position. It has become. Also, in the elevating mechanism 3150, the holding magnet 3166 attached to the upper unit cover 3004 is magnetically attached to the motor cover of the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 of the rotating decorative body unit 3100, so that the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is raised. You can help maintain the position.

  As the pinion gears 3158 rotate, the lift drive motor 3160 on the left side is rotated counterclockwise and the lift drive motor 3160 on the right side is rotated in the clockwise direction simultaneously when viewed from the front. Thus, the left slide member 3152 slides in the clockwise direction and the right slide member 3152 slides in the counterclockwise direction via the rack gear 3152b meshing with the pinion gear 3158. That is, one end side of the left and right slide members 3152 moves downward, and the rotary ornament body unit 3100 supported by the unit support hole 3152a on the one end side moves downward. In this example, when each slide member 3152 starts moving in the descending direction, the contact portion 3162a of the detection member 3162 is detached from the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152, and the contact portion 3162a detects it. By detaching from the part 3152d, the detection member 3162 is rotated by the urging means, and the detection piece 3162b is detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164.

  By the way, the left and right slide members 3152 move along arcuate slide axes that are symmetrically arranged, so that the distance between one end sides of the slide member 3152 also changes according to the movement position. However, since the unit support hole 3152a for supporting the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is formed in a long hole shape, the support pin 3136 and the support bush 3138 of the rotary ornament body unit 3100 slide in the unit support hole 3152a. The rotary ornament body unit 3100 can be supported in response to a change in the distance between the one end sides, and the slide member 3152 (rotary ornament body unit 3100) can be smoothly slid (lifted / lowered). .

  When the one end side of the slide member 3152 slides downward by the rotational drive of the elevating drive motor 3160 and the end of the other end side of the slit in the slide member 3152 comes into contact with the second slide holding member 3156, the second slide holding member 3156 regulates the slide of the slide member 3152, stops the movement of the slide member 3152 in the downward direction, stops the rotational drive of the lift drive motor 3160, and the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is in the lowered position. (See FIG. 170B).

  Then, when the rotary ornament body unit 3100 reaches the lowered position, as described above, the lock solenoid 3127 is driven to release the lock piece 3128a of the lock member 3128, and then the rotary ornament body drive motor 3106 is driven to rotate. The first rotating member 3112, the second rotating member 3114, and the rotating decorative body 3102 are rotated, and each rotating decorative body 3102 is rotated around the first shaft member 3116 by the centrifugal force to protrude outward. In this state, a rotation effect is presented to the player (see FIG. 170 (C)). Note that rotation of the rotating decorative body 3102 may be started before the rotating decorative body unit 3100 reaches the lowered position.

  On the other hand, when the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the one end side of the slide member 3152 is slid in the upward direction by rotating each officer drive motor 3160 in the opposite direction. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 starts to rise. When the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152 contacts the contact portion 3162a of the detection member 3162, the detection piece 3162b of the detection member 3162 rotates, and the detection piece 3162b cannot be detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164. The rotation drive of the elevating drive motor 3160 is stopped, the slide of the slide member 3152 is stopped, and the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is positioned at the raised position (see FIG. 170 (A)).

  As described above, according to the lifting mechanism 3150 of the present example, the slide member 3152 having the rack gear 3152b is formed in an arc shape, and therefore, compared to the case where the slide member 3152 is formed in a linear shape, the center accessory 2300 in the arrangement range. Even if the arrangement space in the radially extending direction around the center of the (game area 605) is narrow, the slide member 3152 can be bent to make the slide member 3152 longer, and the rotary decoration body unit 3100 can be raised and lowered. The range can be made as long as possible, and the rotation decoration body unit 3100 that moves greatly can prevent the player from being entertained to reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, a transparent and long slide member 3152 supporting the rotary ornament body unit 3100 on one end side moves in the arc-shaped slide axis direction extending inward of the frame-shaped center accessory 2300, so that the rotary ornament The body unit 3100 can be moved in the vertical direction, and the slide member 3152 extends so as to substantially follow the movement locus of the rotary decorative body unit 3100. Therefore, as seen in a conventional pachinko machine, Compared to the case where the decorative body is supported and moved by the arm member (corresponding to the slide member) from the direction intersecting (substantially orthogonal), the slide member 3152 that moves together with the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is less conspicuous. The rotating decorative body unit 3100 can be relatively conspicuous, and the rotating decorative body unit 31 Entertaining movement of rotation decorations 3102 0 interest in the game and can be suppressed.

[2-5A-3. Swing decoration unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 to FIG. 173, the swing ornament body unit 3200 in the upper unit 3002 has a plurality of (four) swing ornament bodies 3202 in the shape of a bill and the swing ornament body 3202 on the tip side. A rod-shaped eaves member 3204 supported so as to be rotatable and supported so as to be rotatable around a predetermined axis whose base end side extends in the front-rear direction, and the eaves member 3204 can be rotated in the left-right direction and slidable in the left-right direction. A plate-like slide plate 3206, a base member 3208 that supports the slide plate 3206 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a base end side of the flange member 3204 so as to be rotatable, and a slide plate fixed to the front surface of the base member 3208 3206 and the cover member 3210 that covers the front surface of the eaves member 3204, and the cover member 3210 is fixed to A swing drive motor 3212 that slide-drives the id plate 3206 in the left-right direction, an upper unit rear decoration board 3214 that is disposed at a substantially center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the cover member 3210, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side; A swing decoration body decoration substrate 3216 mounted with a plurality of LEDs that are mounted on the rear side of the member 3208 and can be illuminated from the rear side with a plurality of swing decoration bodies 3202 on the front side, and a slide base 3206 fixed to the base member 3208. And a swing detection sensor 3218 for detecting the slide position of the main body.

  As shown in the figure, the swing ornament body 3202 of the swing ornament body unit 3200 has substantially the same shape as a so-called high bill with a roof-like rod placed on the upper side of a shogi piece, and three pieces of wood are suspended on the front surface. The shape is similar to that of the naruko, and the whole is integrally formed of a transparent resin, and the back surface is formed substantially flat. The swing decorative body 3202 is colored corresponding to each part from the back side.

  Further, the bar-shaped eaves member 3204 includes a slit extending in the longitudinal direction, and a swing pin protruding forward from the slide base 3206 is inserted into the slit. In addition to the swing pin 3206a, the slide base 3206 has three elongated holes extending in the left-right direction, and the base end side of the flange member 3204 can be rotated to the base member 3208 separately from the slide holes. And a detection piece 3206e provided with a notch 3206d at a predetermined position, and a long-hole-shaped swing extending in the vertical direction at the left end in a front view. And a slit 3206f. In the swing slit 3206f of the slide base 3206, a crankshaft 3220a disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft of the crank member 3220 fixed to the rotation shaft of the swing drive motor 3212 is slidable. It is supposed to be inserted.

  Further, the base member 3208 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened by a synthetic resin having translucency, and a slide support shaft 3208a inserted into the slide hole 3206b of the slide base 3206, and a collar member A boss-like shaft fixing portion 3208b for fixing a support shaft 3205 that pivotally supports the proximal end side of 3204. By inserting the slide support shaft 3208a of the base member 3208 into the slide hole 3206b of the slide base 3206 via a predetermined bush, the slide base 3206 can be slidably supported in the left-right direction. In this state, the shaft fixing portion 3208b is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 3206c of the slide base 3206, so that the support shaft 3205 fixed to the shaft fixing portion 3208b does not hit the slide base 3206. .

  Further, the base member 3208 has a translucent window 3208c penetrating in a X shape at a portion located on the rear side of the swing decorative body 3202. The LED mounted on the swing decorative body decoration board 3216 is arranged after the light transmitting window 3208c, and light from the LED directly passes to the front swing decorative body 3202 through the light transmitting window 3208c. Irradiated.

  Next, the movement of the swing ornament body 3202 in the swing ornament body unit 3200 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIG. Although not shown in the front view, the swing decorative body unit 3200 is in a state in which the collar member 3204 extends in a substantially vertical direction in a normal state. In this state, the sliding support of the base member 3208 is supported. The shaft 3208a is in a state of being positioned at the approximate center in the left-right direction of the slide hole 3206b in the slide base 3206 (see FIG. 172 and the like). In this state, the notch 3206d of the detection piece 3206e in the slide base 3206 is in a position substantially coincident with the swing detection sensor 3218, and the detection piece 3206e is in a non-detection state. Further, the crank member 3220 fixed to the rotation shaft of the swing drive motor 3212 is in a state where the crank shaft 3220a is located at either the top dead center or the bottom dead center.

  When the swing drive motor 3212 is rotationally driven in this state, the crankshaft 3220a of the crank member 3220 starts rotating around the circumference of a predetermined radius with respect to the rotation shaft. By the circular movement of the crankshaft 3220a, the crankshaft 3220a slides in the swing slit 3206f in the slide base 3206, and the slide base 3206 slides in the left-right direction along the slide hole 3206b by the crank action. Along with the movement of the slide base 3206 in the left-right direction, the swing pin 3206a of the slide base 3206 inserted into the slit 3204a of the flange member 3204 also moves, so that the flange member 3204 rotates about the base end side. The swing decorative body 3202 that is pivotally supported on the tip side also moves in the same direction as the slide base 3206.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (A), when the crankshaft 3220a of the crank member 3220 reaches the rightmost position in a front view, the movement of the swing decorative body 3202 to the right also becomes maximum, and further, the crankshaft When the rotation of the crankshaft 3220a is started, the crankshaft 3220a starts moving to the left side, and the swing decorative body 3202 is also moved to the left side through the flange member 3204. When the crankshaft 3220a reaches the leftmost position, the swing decoration is started. The leftward movement of the body 3202 is also maximized (see FIG. 173 (B)). In this manner, the crankshaft 3220a is repeatedly circulated so that the slide base 3206 slides alternately in the left-right direction, the swing decoration body 3202 alternately moves in the left-right direction, and the swing decoration body 3202 moves left and right. You can make it shake.

  Since the swing decorative body 3202 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the collar member 3204, when the moving direction of the slide base 3206 (the collar member 3204) changes, the inertial force of the collar member 3204 is changed. The swing decorative body 3202 rotates around the front end side and moves more greatly than the movement of the front end of the collar member 3204, and the movement of the swing decorative body 3202 that swings greatly can be enjoyed. ing.

  When the slide base 3206 slides from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right, the swing detection sensor 3218 detects the detection piece 3206e of the slide base 3206, and the swing decoration body 3202 swings. Is stopped by stopping the swing drive motor 3212 at a position where the detection piece 3206e is not detected, that is, a position where the notch 3206d of the detection piece 3206e and the swing detection sensor 3218 substantially coincide. Thus, the hook member 3204 can be returned to a general state (initial position) in which the hook member 3204 is in a substantially vertical state.

  Thus, according to the swing ornament body unit 3200 of this example, since a plurality (four) of swing ornament bodies 3202 swing in the left-right direction, the player can be entertained by the movement, and the game It can suppress that interest falls. Further, the swing decorative body 3202 pivotally supported on the distal end side of the collar member 3204 is moved in the left-right direction by a slide base 3206 that slides in the left-right direction through a slit 3204a in the middle of the collar member 3204 supported on the base end side. Since the swing ornament body 3202 can be moved more than the slide base 3206, the swing ornament body 3202 can be moved more greatly. The effect can be easily noticed by the player, and by noticing the swing, a sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[2-5A-4. Movable ceiling unit]
The movable ceiling unit 3300 in the upper unit 3002 is disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3200 slightly behind the rotating decorative body unit 3100, and connects the upper inner periphery of the center accessory 2300 and the upper end of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is provided with a plate-like ceiling decoration body 3302 that ties together to form a ceiling, and is composed of a left movable ceiling unit 3300L arranged on the left side and a right movable ceiling unit 3300R arranged on the right side. Yes. As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176, the movable ceiling unit 3300 includes a rectangular plate-like ceiling decoration body 3302 having a rotation shaft 3302a on one side extending in the left-right direction, and a ceiling decoration body 3302. A ceiling base 3304 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 3302a, and a ceiling decoration body 3302 that is fixed to one rotation shaft 3302a of the ceiling decoration body 3302 and is eccentric from the axis of the rotation shaft 3302a. Is a link member 3306 having a shaft portion 3306a extending in the opposite direction, and a predetermined axial center extending in parallel with the rotation shaft 3302a at a position different from the shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306 and the rotation shaft 3302a of the ceiling decorative body 3302 And an engaging portion 3308a that is slidably engaged with the shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306, and a plurality of portions along the outer circumference of the arc shape. A cam member 3308 having a gear portion 3308b in which teeth are arranged, a circular drive gear 3310 meshing with the gear portion 3308b of the cam member 3308, a ceiling drive motor 3312 for rotating the drive gear 3310, and a ceiling drive It mainly includes a motor fixing member 3314 that supports the motor 3312 and supports the cam member 3308 so as to be slidable in the arc extending direction and is fixed to the ceiling base 3304.

  The movable ceiling unit 3300 is disposed on the opposite side of the motor fixing member 3314 with the cam member 3308 interposed therebetween, and cooperates with the motor fixing member 3314 to hold the cam member 3308 slidably in the arc direction. The motor fixing member 3314 further includes a ceiling position detection sensor 3318 that is fixed to the outside of one slide end portion of the cam member 3308 and detects the slide position of the cam member 3308. As for the cam member 3308 in this movable ceiling unit 3300, the engaging part 3308a is arrange | positioned at one edge part of a circular arc direction, and the gear part 3308b is formed in the circular-arc-shaped outer peripheral surface. The cam member 3308 has a slit 3308c extending in the arc direction and a detection piece 3308d detected by the ceiling position detection sensor 3318 in a flat plate shape disposed at the other end. On the other hand, the motor fixing member 3314 has a cylindrical shaft pin 3314a that is slidably inserted into the slit 3308c of the cam member 3308, and the cam member 3308 extends within the slit 3308c by the shaft pin 3314a. It is possible to slide in the arc direction.

  Further, the movable ceiling unit 3300 is arranged on the back side of the ceiling decoration body 3302 and has a ceiling decoration board 3320 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and wiring that is attached to the top surface of the ceiling base 3304 and connected to the ceiling decoration board 3320. A wiring retainer 3322 for holding, and a bracket 3324 for fixing the movable ceiling unit 3300 fixed to the upper surface of the ceiling base 3304 to the upper unit base 3006 are further provided. Further, as illustrated, the ceiling base 3304 has a side wall portion 3304a that hangs downward from an end portion facing the outside of the game area 605 in the left-right direction. When the movable ceiling unit 3300 is attached to the lower side of the side wall 3304a of the ceiling base 3304, the movable ceiling unit 3300 is attached to the side wall member 3326 and the back side of the side wall member 3326 (the side facing the outside of the game area 605). And a side wall decorative board 3328 mounted thereon. Although not shown in detail, the ceiling decorative body 3302 of this example includes a main body having a plurality of shuriken-shaped through holes and a translucent lens that is inserted and fitted into the through holes of the main body from the back side. The LED is mounted at a position corresponding to the back side of the through hole of the ceiling decorative board 3320.

  Next, the movement of the movable ceiling unit 3300 in the upper unit 3100 of this example will be described. In a normal state, the movable ceiling unit 3300 has a plate-like ceiling decoration body 3302 facing in a substantially horizontal direction so as to close the upper surface of the inner peripheral rear side of the center accessory 2300. It ’s like a ceiling. In this state, the cam member 3308 is in the raised position, and the detection piece 3308d is detected by the ceiling position detection sensor 3318.

  When the ceiling drive motor 3312 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction from this state, the cam member 3308 having the gear portion 3308b that meshes with the drive gear 3310 along with the rotation of the drive gear 3310 follows the arc direction in which the cam member 3308 extends. Move downward. When the engaging portion 3308a also moves downward together with the cam member 3308, a force acts in a direction in which the shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306 engaged with the engaging portion 3308a also moves downward, and the force causes the shaft portion 3306a. As a result, the link member 3306 rotates so as to move downward. By the rotation of the link member 3306, the ceiling decoration body 3302 rotates about the rotation shaft 3302a, and the rear side extending in the left-right direction of the ceiling decoration body 3302 starts to move downward.

  When the upper end of the slit 3308c of the cam member 3308 that moves downward along the arc direction comes into contact with the shaft pin 3314a of the motor fixing member 3314, the downward movement of the cam member 3308 is restricted, and the movement of the cam member 3308 is performed. Stops, and the rotational drive of the ceiling drive motor 3312 also stops. In this state, as shown in the drawing, the plate-like ceiling decoration body 3302 is in a substantially vertical state, and the ceiling surface faces the player side (see FIG. 186).

  On the other hand, in order to move the ceiling decoration body 3302 from a substantially vertical state to a substantially horizontal state, the ceiling decoration body 3302 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3302a by rotating the ceiling drive motor 3314 in the opposite direction. , The lower side extending in the left-right direction of the ceiling decorative body 3302 rises and can return to a normal substantially horizontal state.

  As described above, according to the movable ceiling unit 3300 of the present example, the arc-shaped cam member 3308 centered on the predetermined axis disposed at the position eccentric with respect to the rotation axis of the ceiling drive motor 3312 is driven to the ceiling. By sliding the motor 3312 in the arc direction and engaging the eccentric shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306 having the shaft center disposed at a different position with the engaging portion 3308a of the cam member 3308, the link member 3306 is engaged. Since the ceiling decoration body 3302 is rotated via the ceiling, the driven gear having a predetermined diameter is fixed to the rotation shaft 3302a of the ceiling decoration body 3302 and the driven gear is fixed to the rotation shaft of the ceiling drive motor 3312. Compared with the case where the drive gear 3310 is driven to rotate, the rotation mechanism is combined into a compact size. Possible and it will also be able to be placed in a narrow place the movable ceiling unit 3300, to entertain the movement of the ceiling decorations 3302 interest on the game player's can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the ceiling decoration body 3302 is rotated by the ceiling drive motor 3312 via the link member 3306, the cam member 3308, and the drive gear 3310, the ceiling decoration body 3302 is attached to the rotation axis of the ceiling drive motor 3312. Compared with the case where the rotating shaft 3302a is directly connected, the load applied to the rotating shaft of the ceiling drive motor 3312 can be reduced by the gear ratio or the like, and the durability of the ceiling drive motor 3312, that is, the movable ceiling unit 3300 can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring at an early stage.

[2-5B. Character unit]
The character unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, as shown in FIG. 177 and the like, is a model of a ninja and a three-dimensionally shaped character body 3402, and the character body 3402 is moved in the horizontal direction and rotated around a predetermined axis. And a character body moving mechanism 3410 fixed in the back box 621. The character body 3402 in the character unit 3400 is roughly divided into a head 3402a above the neck and a body part 3402b below the neck in a predetermined character. The character unit 3400 further includes a head movable mechanism 3450 that moves the head 3402a and a trunk movable mechanism 3470 that moves the right arm 3402c of the trunk 3402b.

  As shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the character body moving mechanism 3410 in the character unit 3400 is supported at a predetermined position in the back box 621, and has a vertically long plate-like unit base 3411 and an upper front surface of the unit base 3411. An upper guide member 3412 that is fixed and extends in the left-right direction in a box shape that is open at the bottom and rear, a lower guide member 3413 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the unit base 3411, and an upper end that is the unit base 3411 and the upper guide member 3412. Between the unit base 3411 and the lower guide member 3413 so that the lower end is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and slightly downward from the center of the front surface in the vertical direction. A slide having an upper rack gear 3414a in which protruding teeth are arranged in a plurality of rows in the left-right direction. , A rack member 3415 having a lower rack gear 3415a fixed to the front lower end of the slide base 3414 and facing the upper rack gear 3414a, and a head 3402a fixed to the front left side of the slide base 3414 and supporting the head 3402a of the character body 3402. A head support arm 3416 that rotatably supports the head movable mechanism 3450, and a body part movable mechanism that is fixed to the front surface of the slide base 3414 below the head support arm 3416 and supports the body part 3402b of the character body 3402. A character body attached to the front surface of the lower guide member 3413 at a predetermined position between the upper rack gear 3414a and the lower rack gear 3415a so that the rotary shaft extends rearward at a predetermined position between the body portion support arm 3417 that rotatably supports 3470. Drive motor 3418 and key A disk-shaped drive gear 3419 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the tractor body drive motor 3418 and meshes with the lower rack gear 3415a, and meshes with both the drive gear 3419 and the upper rack gear 3414a, and is rotatably supported by the lower guide member 3413. And a ring-shaped sub-gear 3420 having the same outer diameter.

  The upper guide member 3412 in the character body moving mechanism 3410 has a box-shaped front surface with a flat surface extending substantially parallel to the front surface of the unit base 3411. The lower guide member 3413 includes a bottom plate portion 3413a extending a predetermined amount forward from the lower end of the unit base 3411 and extending in the left-right direction, a front plate portion 3413b rising upward in a plate shape from the front end of the bottom plate portion 3413a, A leg portion 3413c is provided that extends rearward from the left and right ends at a predetermined position of the plate portion 3413b and a rear end of which abuts against the front surface of the unit base 3411.

  As shown in the figure, the lower guide member 3413 has a character body drive motor 3418 on the front surface of the front plate portion 3413b so that the rotation shaft is positioned at a position approximately below the center in the vertical direction at the approximate center in the left-right direction. It can be installed. In addition, the lower guide member 3413 further includes four shaft bosses 3413d that protrude in a cylindrical shape rearward from the back surface of the front plate portion 3413b and are arranged in a cross shape above the position where the character body drive motor 3418 is attached. Yes. A rolling bush 3421 is rotatably inserted into each of the shaft bosses 3413d, and the inner periphery of the sub gear 3420 is in contact with the four rolling bushes 3421 (see FIG. 179). Thereby, the sub gear 3420 is rotatably supported by the lower guide member 3413.

  In addition, the character body moving mechanism 3410 includes a pair of upper rollers 3422 that are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction near both ends in the left-right direction at the upper end of the slide base 3414, and downward from the lower surface of the rack member 3415. A pair of lower rollers 3423 that are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, and a shaft that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rack member 3415 adjacent to the lower roller 3423 and extends in the vertical direction And a pair of lower rear rollers 3424 rotatably supported around the lower rear roller 3424. The upper roller 3422 can roll on the back surface of the upper guide member 3412. The lower roller 3423 can roll on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 3413a of the lower guide member 3413, and the lower rear roller 3424 can roll on the front surface of the unit base 3411.

  In addition to the lower rack gear 3415a, the rack member 3415 further includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3415b that protrudes to the front side as shown in the figure. The detection piece 3415b is detected by a character body movement detection sensor 3425 attached to the lower guide member 3413, and the movement position of the lower guide member 3413, that is, the slide base 3414 (character body 3402) in the left-right direction is detected. It can be detected.

  A head support arm 3416 and a body support arm 3417 fixed to the slide base 3414 are respectively provided in a triangular plate-like arm portions 3416a and 3417a protruding forward and separated in the vertical direction, and in the vertical direction near the front ends of the arm portions 3416a and 3417a. Support holes 3416b and 3417b. By inserting into the support holes 3416b and 3417b support shafts 3252b and 3453b of a head movable mechanism 3450, which will be described later, and support shafts 3480b and 3477b of a body movable mechanism 3470, respectively, the head 3402a and the body 3402b are rotated. It can be pivotally supported and can be moved in the left-right direction together with the slide base 3414. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this example, the support holes 3416b and 3417b of the head support arm 3416 and the body support arm 3417 are fixed to the slide base 3414, and the respective axes are different from each other. Is arranged.

  The character body moving mechanism 3410 has a plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, is disposed on the front surface of the slide base 3414, is fixed to the unit base 3411, penetrates in a vertical direction with a predetermined width, and extends in a predetermined direction. A slope member 3426 having a slit 3426a is further provided. On the other hand, as shown in the drawing, the lower guide member 3413 protrudes from the position above the character body driving motor 3418 attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 3413b at the approximate center in the vertical direction, and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped slope piece 3413e is further provided, and a body portion slit 3413f that penetrates in a vertical direction with a predetermined width and extends in a predetermined direction is formed in the slope piece 3413e. The head portion slit 3426a and the body portion slit 3413f of the slope member 3426 and the lower guide member 3413 are formed so as to extend in the forward direction in the plan view (see FIG. 180). In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in this example, the head slit 3426a and the trunk | drum part slit 3413f are formed so that the extension method may mutually differ.

  A slide shaft 3453c of a head movable mechanism 3450 and a slide shaft 3480c of a body movable mechanism 3470, which will be described later, are slidably inserted into the head slit 3426a and the body slit 3413f, respectively. When the head movable mechanism 3450 and the body movable mechanism 3470 move in the left-right direction as the slide base 3414 moves in the left-right direction, the sliding shafts 3453c and 3480c slide along the head slit 3426a and the body slit 3413f. Thus, the head movable mechanism 3450 and the torso movable mechanism 3470, that is, the head 3402a and the torso 3402b of the character body 3402 are rotated around a predetermined axis.

  Further, the character body moving mechanism 3410 includes a character body fixing side relay board 3428 fixed to the right end portion of the unit base 3411, a character body movable side relay board 3429 fixed to the front side of the slide base 3414, and a character body. A wiring cable 3430 for electrically connecting the fixed-side relay board 3428 and the character body movable-side relay board 3429, and a translucent right lens member disposed at the front right end of the character body moving mechanism 3410 and extending in the vertical direction. 3431 and a character body right decorative board 3432 arranged on the rear side of the character body right lens member 3431 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. In this example, a flexible flat cable is used as the wiring cable 3430. Also, the character body right decorative board 3432 is divided into upper and lower parts as shown in the figure.

  On the other hand, the head movable mechanism 3450 in the character unit 3400 has a translucent head base 3451 and a head-top support fixed to the top of the head base 3451 as shown in FIGS. 181 and 182. A member 3452, a lower head support member 3453 fixed to the lower portion of the head base 3451, and a head 3402 a of the character body 3402 supported on the front surface of the head base 3451 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction. A head crank 3454, a head solenoid 3455 that is pivotally driven by the advancement and retraction of the plunger, and is attached to the approximate center of the head base 3451. And a head decoration board 3456 on which LEDs are mounted. A lens portion is formed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the head base 3451, and the light from the head decoration board 3456 can be diffused forward by the lens portion.

  The head upper support member 3452 and the head lower support member 3453 of the head movable mechanism 3450 include a plate-like upper piece portion 3452a and a lower piece portion 3453a extending to the rear side. Cylindrical support shafts 3452b and 3453b extend from the lower surface and the upper surface of the lower piece 3453a so as to face each other. These support shafts 3452b and 3453b are arranged coaxially in plan view. The head lower support member 3453 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft 3453c that extends downward from the lower surface of the lower piece 3453a. The sliding shaft 3453c is disposed on the rear side and the right side in a plan view with respect to the support shafts 3452b and 3453b.

  The head movable mechanism 3450 is moved up and down by inserting the support shafts 3452b and 3453b of the head upper support member 3453 and the head lower support member 3453 into the support holes 3416b of the head support arm 3416 in the character body moving mechanism 3410. It is supported so as to be rotatable around a predetermined axis extending in the direction. Further, by inserting the slide shaft 3453c of the lower head support member 3453 into the head slit 3426a of the slope member 3426 in the character body moving mechanism 3410, the head is moved in accordance with the movement of the slide base 3414 in the left-right direction. By the cam action of the slit 3426a, the head movable mechanism 3450 (the head 3402a of the character body 3402) can be rotated around the support shafts 3252b and 3453b.

  The head moving mechanism 3450 can rotate the head 3402a of the character body 3402 in the vertical direction by appropriately driving the head solenoid 3455, and can make the character move as if the character is scolding. It can be done.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 181 and 183, the body part movable mechanism 3470 in the character unit 3400 is attached and fixed to the back side of the body part 3402 b in the character body 3402 and attached to the back side of the body part 3402 b. A lower arm 3471, a right arm drive motor 3472 fixed to the lower side of the lower member 3471 so that the rotary shaft extends upward, and fixed to the rotary shaft of the right arm drive motor 3472 and above the lower member 3471. A fan-shaped drive gear 3473 arranged with teeth arranged on the fan-shaped outer periphery, a fan-shaped first driven gear 3474 that meshes with the fan-shaped drive gear 3473, and a transmission shaft that rotates together with the first driven gear 3474 and extends upward. 3475, a fan-shaped second driven gear 3476 fixed near the upper end of the transmission shaft 3475, and the upper end of the transmission shaft 3475 The upper member 3477 is supported on the upper side of the lower member 3471 so as to be pivotally supported around the shaft extending in the vertical direction and to support the proximal end side of the right arm portion 3402c in the body portion 3402b in cooperation with the lower member 3471. And. The right arm portion 3402c has a semicircular arm portion gear 3478 that is supported by the lower member 3471 and the upper member 3477 and meshes with the second driven gear 3476 around the rotation shaft, and the right arm drive motor 3472. The right arm portion 3402c is rotated in the horizontal direction by the rotational drive.

  The fan-shaped drive gear 3473 in the body portion movable mechanism 3470 has a fan-shaped detection piece 3473a adjacent to the gear, and is detected by a right arm rotation detection sensor 3479 fixed to the upper surface of the lower member, so that the right arm The rotation position of the part 3402c can be detected.

  The body part movable mechanism 3470 further includes a body part lower support member 3480 fixed to the back side of the body part 3402b at a position below the lower member 3471. The trunk portion lower support member 3480 and the upper member 3477 include a lower piece portion 3480a and an upper piece portion 3477a extending rearward, and cylindrical support shafts are formed from the upper and lower surfaces of the lower piece portion 3480a and the upper piece portion 3477a. 3480b and 3477b extend so as to face each other. These support shafts 3480b and 3477b are arranged coaxially in plan view. The body portion lower support member 3480 includes a cylindrical slide shaft 3480c extending downward from the lower surface of the lower piece portion 3480a. The sliding shaft 3480c is arranged on the rear side and the right side in plan view with respect to the support shafts 3480b and 3477b.

  By inserting the support shafts 3480b and 3477b of the trunk lower support member 3480 and the upper member 3477 into the support holes 3417b of the trunk support arm 3417 in the character body moving mechanism 3410, the trunk movable mechanism 3470 extends in the vertical direction. It is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis. Further, by inserting the slide shaft 3480c of the lower body support member 3480 into the body slit 3413f of the lower guide member 3413 in the character body moving mechanism 3410, the body part is moved in accordance with the movement of the slide base 3414 in the left-right direction. By the cam action of the slit 3413f, the body part moving mechanism 3470 (the body part 3402b of the character body 3402) can be rotated around the support shafts 3480b and 3477b.

  Further, the body part moving mechanism 3470 includes a body part lens member 3481 having translucency inserted from the back side into a through hole that opens in a shuriken shape in the upper left hand of the body part 3402b, and a rear part of the body part lens member 3481. And a body decoration board 3482 that is disposed on the side and has at least one LED mounted on the front surface. The body part lens member 3481 and the body part decoration substrate 3482 are attached to the back side of the body part 3402b.

  This body part movable mechanism 3470 repeats forward rotation and reverse rotation of the right arm drive motor 3472 within the range of the fan-shaped drive gear 3473, so that the right arm part 3402c repeats reciprocal rotation in a substantially horizontal direction, as if the shuriken held in the left hand. Can be operated as if it were being fed out.

  Next, the movement of the character body 3402 in the character unit 3400 of this example will be described. In a normal state, the character body 3402 of the character unit 3400 is located at a retracted position that is almost outside the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1400 when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. Then, the character body 3402 slides to the left by driving the character body drive motor 3418 and is positioned at the participation position located on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 186). It can be slid in the left-right direction from the entry position.

  Specifically, the character body 3402 is supported on the front side of the slide base 3414 in the character body moving mechanism 3410, and meshes with the drive gear 3419 when the drive gear 3419 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction by the character body drive motor 3418. The slide base 3414 moves to one side in the left-right direction via the rack member 3415 having the lower rack gear 3415a. In this character body moving mechanism 3410, a ring-shaped sub gear 3420 disposed on the upper side of the drive gear 3419 is engaged with the drive gear 3419, and rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the drive gear 3419. At the same time, the outer diameter of the sub gear 3420 is the same as the outer diameter of the drive gear 3419 and rotates in the reverse direction at the same speed as the drive gear 3419.

  Further, the sub gear 3420 meshes with the upper rack gear 3414a of the slide base 3414 arranged to face the lower rack gear 3415a, and the rotation of the sub gear 3420 causes the upper rack gear 3414a to move in the same direction at the same speed as the lower rack gear 3415a. Thus, the slide base 3414 moves in one of the left and right directions by the lower rack gear 3415a and the upper rack gear 3414a which are separated in the vertical direction. The detection piece 3415b of the rack member 3415 is detected by the character body movement detection sensor 3425 when the slide base 3414 is moved to the right side, and is not detected when the slide base 3414 is moved to the left side. It is like that.

  The character body moving mechanism 3410 not only moves the character body 3402 in the left-right direction, but also supports the head 3402a and the torso 3402b of the character body 3402 so as to be rotatable about different axes, respectively. The part 3402a and the body part 3402b can be moved at different rotation angles.

  More specifically, the head 3402a of the character body 3402 is pivotally supported by a head support arm 3416 attached to the slide base 3414, and moves in the left-right direction together with the slide base 3414. ing. In addition, the sliding shaft 3453c of the head movable mechanism 3450 in the head 3402a is inserted into the head slit 3426a of the slope member 3426 fixed to the unit base 3411, and the slide base 3414 (head 3402a) is left and right. By moving in the direction, the sliding shaft 3453c slides in the head slit 3426a.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the head slit 3426a is formed to extend to the front side toward the left side. When the head portion 3402a moves to the left side, the sliding shaft 3453c moves to the front side by the head slit 3426c. As a result, the head 3402a rotates around the support shafts 3452b and 3453b that are pivotally supported by the head support arm 3416 due to a change in the position of the sliding shaft 3453c in the front-rear direction.

  On the other hand, the body portion 3402b of the character body 3402 is pivotally supported by a body portion support arm 3417 attached to the slide base 3414, and moves in the left-right direction together with the slide base 3414. . In addition, the sliding shaft 3480c of the body part movable mechanism 3470 in the body part 3402a is inserted into the body part slit 3413f of the lower guide member 3413 fixed to the unit base 3411, and the slide base 3414 (body part 3402b) is inserted. By moving in the left-right direction, the sliding shaft 3480c slides in the body portion slit 3413f.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (C), the body portion slit 3413f is formed to extend to the front side toward the left side. When the body portion 3402b moves to the left side, the sliding shaft 3480c is moved by the body portion slit 3413f. The body portion 3402b rotates around the support shafts 3480b and 3477b supported by the body portion support arm 3417 due to the change in the position in the front-rear direction on the slide shaft 3480c. The head slit 3426c and the torso portion slit 3413f have different forms of extension, and the support shafts 3452b and 3453b of the head portion 3402a and the support shafts 3480b and 2477b of the torso portion 3402b are disposed at different positions. The rotation angles of the head 3402a and the body 3402b are different from each other, and the movement of the character body 3402 is deeply added.

  As described above, according to the character unit 3400 of this example, the character body 3402 slides in the left-right direction so as to be positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and rotates around the predetermined axis. The movement of the character body 3402 allows the character body 3402 to be noticed and entertained, and the movement of the character body 3402 enhances the player's expectation. It can suppress that interest falls.

  Further, the character body 3402 can be moved in the left-right direction and rotated around a predetermined axis by simply sliding the slide base 3414 in the left-right direction by driving the character body drive motor 3418. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a rotation driving means for making the movement of the character body 3402 simple. Further, since no rotation driving means for rotating the character body 3402 is required, a head movable mechanism 3450 or a body for moving the head 3402a, the body 3402b, etc. of the character body 3402 instead of the rotation driving means. Part movement mechanism 3470 and the like can be provided, and the character body 3402 can be made to perform more complicated movements, and the movements can delight and surprise the player, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, with respect to the slide base 3414 that supports the character body 3402 on the front side, on the lower side, the lower roller 3423 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 3413a of the lower guide member 3413, and the lower rear roller 3424 rolls on the front surface of the unit base 3411. The upper roller 3422 rolls on the back surface of the upper guide member 3412 on the upper side, and a load is applied to the slide base 3414 so that the upper end of the character body 3402 falls to the front side. However, the slide base 3414 can be held in a substantially upright state and smoothly slid in the left-right direction.

  Further, in the character body moving mechanism 3410, the slide base 3414 is extended by the upper rack gear 3414a arranged at the lower end and substantially at the center in the vertical direction in addition to the lower rack gear 3415a with respect to the slide base 3414 extending long in the vertical direction. Since it is driven to move in the left-right direction, the slide base 3414 can be smoothly slid without play.

  In addition, since the sub gear 3420 that meshes with the drive gear 3419 and the upper rack gear 3414a is formed in a ring shape, if an excessive force acts on the sub gear 3420, the sub gear 3420 can be elastically deformed to release the force. Further, it is possible to prevent the gear teeth from being engaged and the movement of the slide base 3414 to stop, or the slide base 3141 to move while being loose.

[2-5C. Gear decoration body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the gear decoration body unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 includes three gear-shaped upper gear decoration bodies 3502a, middle gear decoration bodies 3502b, and lower gear decoration bodies 3502c arranged in the vertical direction. The gear decoration body 3502 is provided, and the gear decoration body 3502 rotates according to the gaming state. More specifically, the gear decoration body unit 3500 supports the gear decoration body 3502 such that the gear decoration body 3502 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left-right direction and the left base is opened. A unit cover 3512 that closes the opened left surface, a gear drive motor 3514 that is attached to a lower portion of the left surface of the unit cover 3512 and that has a rotation shaft extending into the unit base 3510, and a drive gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the gear drive motor 3514 3516, a lower gear 3518 that meshes with the drive gear 3516 and is fixed to the shaft portion 3503 of the lower gear decoration body 3502c, and an intermediate gear 3520 that meshes with the lower gear 3518 and is fixed to the shaft portion 3503 of the intermediate gear decoration body 3502b. The upper gear meshed with the middle gear 3520 and fixed to the shaft portion 3503 of the upper gear decoration 3502a. And 522, a mainly provided.

  The gear decoration body unit 3500 includes a gear position detection sensor 3524 that detects the rotational position of the drive gear 3516, and the right side (the gear decoration body 3502 side) of the lower gear 3518, the middle gear 3520, and the upper gear 3522 in the unit base 3510. ) Arranged on the right side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the right side, and a three-dimensional candle decoration simulating a candle that is attached toward the front near the center in the vertical direction at the rear end of the right side of the unit base 3510. It further includes a body 3528 and a candle decoration substrate 3530 which is disposed on the rear side of the candle decoration body 3528 and has an LED mounted on the front surface. The drive gear 3516 includes a detection piece 3516a extending outward in the radial direction, and the detection of the detection piece 3516a by the gear position detection sensor 3524 allows the rotation of the drive gear 3516, that is, the three gear decoration bodies 3502. The position can be detected.

  In this gear ornament body unit 3500, the three gear ornaments 3502 are such that the upper gear ornament 3502a has a larger diameter than the medium gear ornament 3502b and the lower gear ornament 3502c, and the shaft of the medium gear ornament 3502b. The portion 3503 is shorter than the shaft portion 3503 of the upper gear decorative body 3502a and the lower gear decorative body 3502c. Accordingly, the middle gear decoration body 3502b is located on the left side of the gears of the upper gear decoration body 3502a and the lower gear decoration body 3502c and is not engaged therewith. Further, the unit base 3510 is formed with an L-shaped frame pattern and a plurality of gear-shaped reliefs arranged along the bottom and rear sides, as shown in the drawing, on the right side thereof. The design is improved.

  The lower gear 3518, the middle gear 3520, and the upper gear 3522 are spur gears having the same diameter, and the rotation of the driving gear 3516 causes the lower gear 3518 and the upper gear 3522 to be opposite to the driving gear 3516 in the middle gear. 3520 rotates in the same direction as drive gear 3516 at the same rotational speed.

  The three gear decoration bodies 3502 and the unit base 3510 are partially formed to be translucent, and are decorated with light emission by a gear decoration board 3526 arranged in the unit base 3510. In addition, each tooth of the gear decoration body 3502 is opaque, and an LED of the gear decoration board 3526 is mounted at a position corresponding to the position where each tooth circulates. Thereby, the rotation of the gear decoration body 3502 alternately repeats that the light from the gear decoration board 3526 is blocked or not blocked by the teeth of the gear decoration body 3502, thereby changing the light emission mode and the like. It is possible to make a dynamic light-emitting decoration without any problems.

  In this way, the gear decoration body unit 3500 of the present example is configured such that the three gear decoration bodies 3502 arranged in the vertical direction are not meshed with each other, but the shaft extending the gear decoration body 3502 in the left-right direction. Since it is made to rotate around simultaneously, from the player side, it is possible to make an illusion that each gear decoration 3502 is engaged and rotating, and the rotation effect of the gear decoration 3502 is enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral board 4010 group includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. A liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling image display.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 187, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 3022, which detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2012, which detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof The detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3020 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the magnetic detection sensors attached to the gate sensor 2352, the general prize opening sensor 3020, the count sensor 2014, and the back unit 3000, respectively. A detection signal from 3024 is input via the panel relay terminal board 3032 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2010 and the attacker solenoid 2016 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay terminal plate 3032, or the main control I / O The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, and the second special symbol storage display 644 via the O port 4100b, the panel relay terminal board 3032, and the function display board 640a. A drive signal is output to the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game state display 647, and the round display 648.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information), various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and pachinko machines from this payout control board 1186 Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in its built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated at power-on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the decrease of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 187, the payout control board 1186 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the above-described firing motor 695, and the above. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 187, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a, which will be described in detail later, receives various information (game information) related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the input of a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, or the detection signals from the ball break switch 778, the count switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are connected to the relay terminal in the prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, it outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 815 or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, payout is performed based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops driving signal to the payout motor 815 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 187, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmitter circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotational speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. And a firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  As described above, the handle device 460 (operation handle portion 461) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. When the touch operation sensor 464 of the operation handle portion 461 is touched, the touch sensor is provided. When the single button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 187, the peripheral control board 4140 for effect control in the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality performance with a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and the like. A sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored are configured.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the various commands. The door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp driving board 3031 or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4. A game board side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of the LED is output to the lamp driving board 3031, or the left rotating lamp motor 245 of the top lamp lighting unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 and the right rotating lamp. Motor drive the door frame side motor drive command to output the rotation drive signal to the motor 265 and the central rotary lamp motor 285 Rotation decoration body drive motor 3106, elevating drive motor 3160, swing drive motor 3212, ceiling drive motor 3312, character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, gear drive provided on the game board 4 A game board side motor drive command for outputting a rotation drive signal to the motor 3514, a game board side solenoid drive command for outputting a drive signal to the lock solenoid 3127, the head solenoid 3455, and the like are output to the lamp drive board 3031 or a sound ROM 4140d. A control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound signal is output to the sound source IC 4140c, or a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is output to the liquid crystal control board 4150.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, it is different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3031. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3031 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. , 225, 296, etc., and each of the decorative boards 3012, 3014, 3124, 3216, 3320, 3328 provided in the game board 4 based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command. , 3432, 3456, 3482, 3526, 3530 and the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5. Further, the lamp driving board 3031 sends a rotation driving signal based on the received door frame side motor driving command to the left rotating lamp motor 245 and the right rotating lamp motor 265 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. Rotation decoration body drive motor 3106, lift drive motor 3160, swing drive motor provided in game board 4 with rotation drive signal output to central rotary lamp motor 285 or based on received game board side motor drive command. 3212, a ceiling drive motor 3312, a character body drive motor 3418, a right arm drive motor 3472, a gear drive motor 3514, and a drive signal provided to the game board based on the received game board side solenoid drive command. Or output to the lock solenoid 3127 or the head solenoid 3455.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a rotation decoration body 3102, a rotation decoration body unit 3100 (elevating mechanism 3150), a swing decoration body 3202, a ceiling decoration body 3302, a character body 3402 (character body movement mechanism 3410), a right arm. Detection signals from detection sensors 3134, 3164, 3218, 3425, 3479, and 3524 for detecting the movable positions of the portion 3402 c (body portion movable mechanism 3470) and the gear decoration 3502 are input via the lamp driving substrate 3031. Based on these detection signals, the original positions of the rotating decoration body 3102, the rotating decoration body unit 3100, the swing decoration body 3202, the ceiling decoration body 3302, the character body 3402, the right arm portion 3402c, and the gear decoration body 3502 are grasped. is doing.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. Are input via the sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013, respectively, and the rotational positions of the rotary lamps 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 4150 or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 is input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3031. The main button 371 includes a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3031. Yes.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 via the lamp driving board 3031 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control board 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010, as shown in FIG. ROM 4150b, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later. Then, the VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by main scanning for setting the state and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing the main scanning in a direction intersecting with one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs the main scanning on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, liquid crystal display is performed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. In order from the left to the right of the device 1400, the data is output to pixels for one line.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter substrate 1411.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration relating to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188 and the like. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2352 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number which is a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. ROM of main control board 4100 for normal symbol hold storage means 4202 for temporarily storing according to the above conditions, and normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number stored and executed by normal symbol hold storage means 4202 Normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display unit 645 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern. 4206 and the normal disturbance displayed on the normal symbol display 645 by the normal symbol display control means 4206. When the (normal lottery result) is “ordinary hit”, the start port solenoid 2010 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2005, and the normal opening / closing control means 4208 that is normally stored in the normal symbol hold storage means 4202 is stored. Normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of figure random numbers as a memory number on the normal symbol memory display 646 is provided.

  The normal symbol hold storage unit 4202 described above generates a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2352 while the normal symbol display control unit 4206 displays the variation of the normal symbol. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first start port 2001. First special random number generation means (first special random number counter) 4212 for generating a special random number, and first special random number temporarily stored in accordance with a predetermined condition in the first special random number generation means 4212 Symbol hold storage means (first special symbol hold storage area in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a) 4214, and first special symbol change pattern corresponding to the effect group determination random number and variable random number stored by the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 Is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table (variation pattern table) stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 in advance. First special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 and a first special symbol on the first special symbol display 641 variably displayed based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 One special symbol display control means 4218 and a first special symbol memory number display to display on the first special symbol memory display 643 as the number of first special random numbers stored and stored in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 Control means 4220.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2012 by the start winning to the second start port 2002. Second special random number generation means (second special random number counter) 4222 for generating a special random number, and second special random number generated in the second special random number generation means 4222 are temporarily stored according to a predetermined condition. Symbol hold storage means (second special symbol hold storage area in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a) 4224, and the second special symbol change pattern corresponding to the effect group determination random number and variable random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 Is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table (variation pattern table) stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 in advance. The second special symbol on the second special symbol display 642 is variably displayed based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 and the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226. The second special symbol memory number display control means for causing the second special symbol memory display 644 to display the number of the second special random numbers reserved and stored in the second special symbol hold memory means 4224 as the memory number. 4230.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. When the first special random number and the second special random number are triggered by the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2012, respectively. And the execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until it becomes possible to display the variation of the special symbol.

  The main control board 4100 receives the first special random number and the second special random number held in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 for the start winnings 2001 and 2002. Priority reserved digesting means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special random number in preference to the timing is provided, and the priority reserved digesting means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second start port 2002. The lottery result hold is prioritized (digested).

  The main control board 4100 also includes a first special random number (first special lottery result) and a second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224. An advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous based on the special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2006 for closing the special winning opening 2003 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 A special prize opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the operation of the attacker solenoid 2016 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern is provided.

  Further, the main control board 4100 includes a first special symbol variation pattern table in accordance with the determination result based on the first special random number and the determination result based on the second special random number that the advantageous game state is generated by the advantageous game state generation means 4232. And a variation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the second special symbol variation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 changes the fluctuation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). It is.

  Furthermore, the main control board 4100 has a normal symbol variation pattern, a first special symbol variation pattern, a second special symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol corresponding to the normal random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. Command generation means 4238 for generating a command for predetermined control such as an effect command based on the memory, the second special symbol memory, etc., and command transmission for transmitting the command generated by the command generation means 4238 to the peripheral control board 4140 Means 4240.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 600. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven stronger as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2300 flows down from the left and right sides to the upper shelf 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the upper shelf 2301 moves to the left area of the center accessory 2300. It is induced. When a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the gate inlet 2351 of the gate portion 2350 disposed on the left side surface of the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2352, the detection signal is Therefore, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result by the normal random number generation means 4200. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 1400 is displayed in a variable manner (the normal symbol display 645 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 emits light in either red or green). The The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected by the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 645 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2005 that close the second start port 2002 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2002.

  Note that the variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2005 at the second start port 2002 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) to be described later. When “short time per hour (including low probability short time per hour, high probability short time per hour, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the fluctuation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by replacing the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern with a different table and selecting it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, on the upper side of the center accessory 2300, an area where game balls can flow is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2300 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate portion 2350 or the warp inlet 2302. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Accordingly, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461 so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2300 to the left side. It is possible to prevent the game from being reduced by reducing the game operation such that the player is strongly driven and entertaining the game by operating the operation handle portion 461 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the normal symbol display 645 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the gate sensor 2352 detects the passing of the game ball, the normal symbol in the fluctuation is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first is stopped. Until the result of the random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 646. This normal symbol memory display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories according to the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random numbers extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2352 are discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 and have flowed down the left side of the center prize 2300 are drawn to the center of the game area 605 below the center prize 2300 by the shelf 2102 of the side prize port member 2100. It has become. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2004, 2101 arranged below the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3020, the main control board 4100 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 1186, and the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command to store a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls. The tray 311 is paid out.

  Note that if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning opening 2004, 2101, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, and the big winning opening 2003, the gaming area It is provided at the lower center of the left and right direction of 605 and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2004, 2101, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, or the big winning opening 2003, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being discharged.

  On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the warp inlet 2302 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2300, the game ball is supplied to the first stage 2311 on the rear side of the stage 2310 of the center accessory 2300. It has come to be. The game ball supplied onto the first stage 2311 rolls on the first stage 2311 in the left-right direction, is released forward, and is supplied onto the second stage 2312. Also in the second stage 2312, the game ball rolls left and right and is released into the game area 605 above the attacker unit 2000. When the game ball supplied to the stage 2310 enters the central chance entrance 2313 in the first stage 2311, the game ball is discharged into the game area 605 from the chance exit 2314 arranged immediately above the first start port 2001 in the attacker unit 2000. Thus, the game ball is accepted into the first start port 2001 with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2001 and detected by the first start port sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the storage tray 311.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2310 are It can be received at the first start opening 2001 and the like with a high probability, and when the second start opening 2002 and the grand prize winning opening 2003 can be received, it is received when the game ball is released from the stage 2310 or the chance exit 2314. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first starting port 2001 but also the second starting port 2002 and the grand prize winning port 2003 can be expected to have a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls, and can be enhanced. Yes.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate entrance 2351 of the gate portion 2350 and is detected by the gate sensor 2352 and “normal hit” is selected as the normal lottery result, the second start port 2002 is closed as described above. When the pair of movable pieces 2005 expands for a predetermined time to be able to win, and when the winning is possible, when the game ball is received by the second start port 2002 and detected by the second start port sensor 2012, the main control is performed. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311 via the substrate 4100 or the like.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2012, the first start port At the port 2001, the first special random number generator 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number. At the second start port 2002, the second special random number generator 4222 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Is called. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, a mode that suggests “big hit” (15R big hit symbol (15R high probability short-time A suggesting 15R high probability short-time symbol, 15R high probability short-time symbol) 15R high-probability short-time B symbol that suggests B, 15R low-probability short-time symbol that suggests 15R low-probability short-time per symbol, JP-per-JP symbol that suggests JP jackpot), 2R big-hit symbol (2R high-probability short-time symbol) 2R high-probability short-time symbol 2R high-probability non-time-short symbol suggesting 2R high-probability non-short-time symbol)) When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. When a special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) occurs, a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening 2003 during that time, so that more games can be played. It has to be able to win the ball. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

  Note that, in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 as well, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display by the entry of the game ball into the gate portion 2350. When the special symbol is variably displayed at 642 or when the special symbol such as the big hit gaming state as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the starting port 2001, 2002 and the first starting port sensor 3022, when it is detected by the second starter sensor 2012, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first starter sensor 3022 and the second starter sensor 2012 until the special symbol variation display becomes possible. The first special random number or the second special random number is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224, and the display is put on hold. Ri, which is the number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the first special symbol memory indicator 643 or the second special symbol memory indicator 644. The first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission states of the respective LEDs that are turned off / on / flash. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. The second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold digesting unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. Is executed (digested). That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2002 is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2001.

  In the main control board 4100, the special random numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2012 are collated with the jackpot determination table. Thus, it is determined whether the special random number is “lost” or “big hit”, and “big hit” is extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2012. In addition, by comparing the design random numbers of the first design random number and the second design random number with the design determination table, whether the design random number is “2R big hit” or “15R big hit” and “high probability non-short time” It is discriminated whether it is “winning”, “short chance at low probability” or “short hit at high probability”.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 (the special lottery result) is “15R big hit” In this case, after the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened by the advantageous game state generating means 4232, the main control board 4100 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10). When one of the game balls of the game ball satisfies the winning condition 2003, the opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2006 (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). In the case of “2R big hit”, the main control board 4100 is opened / closed member 200 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232. Opening / closing member when a predetermined time (for example, about 0.3 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy a winning condition in the big winning opening 2003 after the game is opened. An open / close pattern in which 2006 is closed (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated twice (two rounds) to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, according to the first special random number or the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 (special lottery In addition to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 being variably displayed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 also responds to a special random number (special lottery result). The effect image is displayed. Specifically, when the first special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol variation display performed by the second special symbol display 642 are started, the liquid crystal display Also in the device 1400, in a state where a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols (in this example, “0” to “9” symbols) are displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of left, middle, and right). Fluctuation display of each decorative symbol sequence is started, then stopped in sequence, and when all decorative symbol sequences are finally stopped, the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped decorative symbols is determined. The result is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, after the plurality of decorative symbol sequences are variably displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. Specifically, the 15R high-probability short-time symbol (15R high-probability short-time symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 in synchronization with the derivation display of the 15R high-probability short-time symbol A in the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 ( The same odd number symbol combination) is derived and displayed, and the B symbol (the combination of the same even number of symbols) is selected in advance in synchronization with the derivation display of B per 15R high probability time short. A combination of the same even symbols (for example, “222” and “444”) may be derived and displayed, and the 15R low-probability short-time symbol (same as the decorative symbol) may be synchronized with the derived display per 15R low-probability short-time. In addition, among the even symbols, a combination of the same even symbols determined in advance (different from the B symbol per 15R high probability short-time of the decorative symbol) (for example, “ 66 ”and“ 888 ”))), and the decorative symbols per JP (a combination including all of“ 1 ”,“ 2 ”, and“ 3 ”) in synchronism with the derived display of the JP jackpot Derived and displayed, 2R high probability short-time symbol (a combination including all of “1”, “2”, and “3”) of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in synchronization with the derived display per 2R high-probable time In synchronization with the derivation display per probability non-short-time, the 2R high-probability non-time-short per symbol (a combination including all “1”, “2”, and “3”) of the decoration symbol is derived and displayed.

  In this example, one of the combinations including all of the decorative symbols “1”, “2”, and “3” is derived as a symbol per JP, 2R high probability short-time symbol, and 2R high probability non-short-time symbol. It is difficult to discriminate between JP big hit, 2R high probability short-time and 2R high probability short-time short-term, from the decorative symbols that are controlled to be displayed and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. ing. The JP jackpot is executed 15 rounds, and among the 15 rounds, first, the same control as the 2R jackpot (open / close control of the big prize opening 2003 with the same opening / closing pattern as the 2R jackpot) ) Is executed, the same control as the 15R big hit (open / close control of the big winning opening 2003 with the same open / close pattern as the 15R big hit) is executed as the remaining round. In this example, since it is difficult to determine which of JP big hit, 2R high probability short-time and 2R high probability non-short-time hit from the decorative symbols derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, Not only is it difficult to realize that it is a JP big hit, but it also makes it difficult to realize that it is a 2R big hit even if it becomes a 2R big hit (2R high probability short-time hit, 2R high probability non-short-time short hit) Even if it is a 2R big hit, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a JP big hit.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 individually displays the number of game balls won at the first start port 2001 and the number of game balls won at the second start port 2002 as the number of reserves (starting memory number). is doing. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d as areas for displaying the number of hold of the first special symbol corresponding to the number of game balls won in the first start port 2001. There are four display areas, and four display areas of second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h are displayed as areas for holding the number of hold of the second special symbol according to the number of game balls won in the second start opening 2002. have. Then, based on the command (holding number command) from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140a sets the first holding display areas 1400a to 1400d to the first when the holding number of the first special symbol is zero. Displayed in the hold mode, and when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 1, the display of the first hold display area 1400a is changed to the second hold mode different from the first hold mode, When the number of holds is 2, the display of the first hold display area 1400a and the first hold display area 1400b is changed to the second hold mode, and when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 3, the first hold display The display of the areas 1400a to 1400c is changed to the second holding mode, and when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 4, the display of the first holding display areas 1400a to 1400d is changed to the second holding mode. Similarly, when the second special symbol hold number is 0, the second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h are displayed in the first hold mode, and when the second special symbol hold number is 1, When the display of the hold display area 1400e is changed to a second hold mode different from the first hold mode, and the number of holds of the second special symbol is 2, the second hold display area 1400e and the second hold display area 1400f Is changed to the second holding mode, and when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 3, the display of the second holding display areas 1400e to 1400g is changed to the second holding mode, When the number of holds is 4, the display of the second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h is changed to the second hold mode. That is, the number of the first special symbol hold and the number of the second special symbol hold are specified by the number of the first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d and the number of the second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h displayed in the second hold mode. It is displayed as possible. In this example, the number of game balls won at the first start port 2001 and the number of game balls won at the second start port 2002 are individually displayed as the hold number (starting memory number). Although configured, the number of game balls won in the first start port 2001 and the number of game balls won in the second start port 2002 may be displayed together.

  The first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d are displayed every time the first special symbol variation display is started (specifically, every time a variation pattern command indicating that the first special symbol variation display is started is received). ) (The display of the first hold display areas 1400b to 1400d is moved to the first hold display area 1400a to 1400c), and the display of the second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h starts the variable display of the second special symbol. Every time (specifically, every time a variation pattern command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started) is shifted (the display of the second reserved display regions 1400f to 1400h is changed to the first reserved display regions 1400e to 1400g). Is displayed).

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation display executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes the first special symbol variation display executed by the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 executed by the second special symbol display 642. This is executed in synchronization with the change display of the symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed before the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed. Further, since the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol indicators 641 and 642, generally, the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. We will pay attention to the decorative pattern.

  As one of the effects in which the plurality of decorative symbol sequences are variably displayed, a combination of the decorative symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol) which are stopped and displayed while leaving one variable decorative symbol sequence (for example, the middle decorative symbol). Satisfies the specific condition (stops at the same symbol), or executes decorative symbol variation display (so-called full rotation reach) in synchronism so that the same symbol combination is displayed in all the ornament symbol rows. There are “Leach production”, and the special lottery results when this “Reach production” is executed include “Leach per game” that stops the jackpot symbol after reaching the reach, and “Leach lose” that stops the display after the reach production. . There is also a “reach development effect” which is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect” and executes an effect such as highlighting and displaying the remaining decorative symbol sequence that is variably displayed after the reach display. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only an effect display related to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect” displayed during the jackpot game state.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 187). The variation display of decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. It has become. As a result, the variation display of the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, so that a certain lot related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. By preparing a plurality of decorative pattern variation patterns in advance for one command (variation pattern command), it is possible to increase the variation patterns of the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In addition, “big hit game effects” and the like executed during the big hit game state and the like are controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and various patterns of effects are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect performed without increasing the processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and hard to get bored can be achieved. ing.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, various movable decorative bodies 3100, 3102, 3202, 3302, 3402, 3502, etc. provided in the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result, etc. And the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards 3012, 3014, 3124, 3214, 3216, 3320, 3328, 3432, 3456, 3482, 3526, 3530 provided in the game board 4 and the like are appropriately driven. In this way, the player can be entertained by a movable effect and a light effect.

[5. Control processing]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 189 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 624a is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 624a is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch 624a outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is stored, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to by the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 624a is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. As a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 in response to the effect group determination random number and the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the game, the variable display of the special symbol. Reach random number (reach random number) used for lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute reach production, and when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number, it is used for a lottery process for determining the type of big hit Design random numbers (first design random numbers, second design random numbers), random numbers (normal random numbers) used for the lottery process for winning when the movable piece 2005 is activated, etc. And a random number counter for storing random numbers.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2001 is won for starting, the second starting port 2002 is won for starting. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (the production group determination random number and the variable random number) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. In addition, after the process of step S1 and S2 is performed in this way, only the process of said step S2 is fundamentally repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 189 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 189 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2352, the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2012, the count sensor 2014, and the general winning port sensor 3020 are input. Is done. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-described random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable symbol variable display is stopped. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a win as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2005 as a process of step S15. The normal symbol process will be described later, but basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2005 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 2R big hit gaming state). A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the time required for the normal symbol variation display control is shortened by a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the opening time of the movable piece 2005 is extended, thereby reducing the time-saving state. Is to be realized.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral board 4010 or the like is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 2R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the processing of step S18. .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2012, the count sensor 2014, the general winning port sensor 3020, and the like as the process of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a mounted on the payout control board 1186 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of start memories as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 190, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3022. On condition that the detection signal is on (the ball enters the first starting port 2001) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2002) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S39) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S36), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3022 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2001, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, the effect group determination random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing of step S44. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the control is in the time reduction state (high probability time reduction state, low probability time reduction state) is set (step S45), and the time reduction flag is set. If not, whether or not it will be a big hit based on the first special random number acquired in step S43 and the mode type of the game effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the effect group determination random number (in this example, the pseudo fluctuation described later) After performing the effect pre-determination process that determines the type according to the number of times) before starting the variable display based on the random number (step S46), the process ends.

  In this example, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a design random number are used as the variation pattern table (see FIG. 201) used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Plural types of tables corresponding to the determination result based on (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) (table having a high ratio of not performing pseudo-variation described later in this example (reach 1, 2R1, specific 1, non-specific 1) 3 of a table (reach 2, 2R2, specific 2, non-specific 2) having a high ratio of executing pseudo fluctuation twice and a table (reach 3, 2R3, specific 3, non-specific 3) of executing pseudo fluctuation three times Types of tables). The plurality of types of variation pattern tables provided for each determination result are set so that the types and ratios of the selected variation patterns are different, and the mode types of game effects executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are different for each table. (Not limited to completely different ones, some of them may overlap). When the main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), first, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol) Corresponding by selecting a table corresponding to the production group determination random number from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the random number, the second symbol random number), and comparing the selected table with the variable random number Determine the fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, when a winning prize is set at the first starting port 2001, if the time reduction flag is set (step S45), the number-of-holding command corresponding to the number of the first special symbol is held without performing the effect predetermination process. Is set to end the process (step S47). Thereby, when controlling to the short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) to increase the start winning to the second start port 2002, the start winning is not performed without executing the preliminary determination related to the first special symbol. Only the process of notifying the occurrence and the number of reserved first special symbols is executed.

  In this example, when a start winning is generated at the first start port 2001, if the gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state), the pre-determination related to the first special symbol is not executed. However, when the game state is a short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state), a notice effect (pre-reading notice) that is executed in connection with the occurrence of a start winning at the first start port 2001 In the case where a start winning is generated at the first starting port 2001, the preliminary determination related to the first special symbol is always executed regardless of the gaming state, and the hold including the result of the preliminary determination is performed. The peripheral control MPU 4140a that has received the number command may be configured not to execute the notice effect (pre-read notice) that is executed in connection with the start winning prize if the gaming state is the short-time state.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2012 is on and it is determined that a game ball has entered the second start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, the effect group determination random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of the second special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to win the game based on the second special random number acquired in step S53 and the type type of the game effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the effect group determination random number based on the random number. After performing the effect pre-determination process determined before starting a variable display (step S56), a process is complete | finished.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (steps S46 and S55). The effect predetermination process executed in step S46 of the first start port passing process and the effect predetermination process executed in step S55 of the second start port passing process are common program modules, and the random number used for the determination is Since only the difference is made, only the effect predetermination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S46 of the first start port passage process will be described here. It should be noted that the lottery probability of whether to win a jackpot based on the first special random number and the lottery probability of whether to win the jackpot based on the second special random number, or the first special symbol effect group determination random number And the variation pattern selected based on the random random number and the variation pattern selected based on the random number and the random number determined based on the random number of the second special symbol are passed through the first start opening. The table referred to in the effect preliminary determination process executed in step S46 of the process may be different from the table referred to in the effect advance determination process executed in step S55 of the second start port passage process.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 194 and the acquired random number, specifically, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the production group decision random number and the variable random number, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, and the reach effect as a game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 if it is not a big hit Or the type of game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In addition, when the probability variation flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set, it is determined whether or not the big hit is made by comparing the high probability big hit determination value with the first special random number. If the probability variation flag is not set, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made by comparing the low probability jackpot determination value with the first special random number. The high-probability jackpot determination value (1499 to 1548) is set in a high-probability jackpot determination table, which will be described later, and is set to the same random number as the jackpot determination value to be compared with the special random number. (1544 to 1548) are set to a jackpot determination table at a low probability, which will be described later, and are set to the same random number as the jackpot determination value to be compared with the special random number. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the high-probability prior determination table or the low-probability preliminary determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately specify whether or not it is a big hit.

  In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot judgment value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table, or a part or all of the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table is different from the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, the jackpot determination value that can be determined as a high-probability random number group and a part of the determination value that is different from the jackpot determination value and the jackpot determination value can be determined as the high-probability random number group. The ratio of the loss judgment value is a higher probability random number determining unit that is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot determination table that determines the winning probability of the jackpot, and the winning of the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring unit For the jackpot determination in which random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) are classified and classified as either the above-mentioned determination value or the jackpot determination value, the same determination is performed while maintaining this unexecuted state. Determining whether or not the winning random number provided to is a value belonging to the high probability random number group in which the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value are mixed, A pseudo-probability advance determination unit that enables execution of an advance determination on an expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) related to a jackpot winning for each determination process that is in a state of staying, The degree of expectation related to winning may be determined in advance.

  In this way, by including the high probability random number determination unit with the jackpot determination value and the loss determination value mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot determination that is still on hold can be leaked While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates, the expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning according to the mixture ratio of jackpot judgment value and outlier judgment value in the means with high probability random number determination The preceding determination can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the decision processing based on the random number value (value belonging to the low-probability random number group that is paired with the high-probability random number group) that is not the pre-determined special hit determination value is expected, It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected value of the jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high-probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in the execution state (pending state). In addition, the expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as a new output of the hold display or a shift display corresponding to the hold-up. Will come to be.

  Then, as a result of the comparison between the pre-determination table and the acquired random number, the specified information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, or the liquid crystal display device 1400 if it is not a big hit) A reach effect is executed as a game effect, or a first special symbol hold number command indicating a hold number of the first special symbol (a value of the first special hold number counter) is set. (Step S62). As a result, the start opening (one of the first start opening 2001 and the second start opening 2002) in which the start winning is generated, the number of holdings stored corresponding to the start opening, and the start winning based on the generated start winning Whether or not the display result of the variable symbol display of one special symbol is a big hit, whether the big win is the type of the big win, and if the big hit is not, whether the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S37). In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. Variations of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 based on the production group determination random number and the variable random number, and variation of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process or the like for the aspect is performed
4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 is stopped (step S83).
5). The first special symbol display 641 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 189).

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 196, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As a process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Stored in the earliest storage area of random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the production group determination random number and the variable random number) Read the random number from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. First-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode of random numbers (first special random number, reach random number, first design random number, reach random number, production group determination random number and variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped Shift operation with.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first) become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a high probability state shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 198A is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 198 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a, and is a jackpot determination table at the low probability used when the gaming state is at a low probability (normal state and low probability short state). And a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is at a high probability (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state). In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, the five types of special random numbers (the first special random number and the second special random number) coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 1544 types of random number values are out of the above. The special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that

  Also, in the jackpot determination table at high probability, the same special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) as the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) set in the jackpot determination table at low probability ) Including the special random numbers (first special random number, first special random number, second special random number) so that the jackpot determination value matches the 1499 types of random numbers. Second special random numbers) are associated with each other. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-time-short state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit is won is 10 in the low probability (normal state and short-time state). Doubled.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that it is out of place, the result of the comparison between the reach determination table (not shown) and the reach random number read out in step S102 (step S117). S118), processing by setting a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach Completed (step S119). Note that, in the reach determination table, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, the reach determination value indicating that the 9 types of reach random numbers are reached matches the reach determination value indicating that the 230 types of reach random numbers are not reached. Thus, the reach random numbers are associated with each other.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 199, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set, main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 198 (B) (step S122). ), Determining the type of jackpot and determining the mode (first special symbol stop symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 198 (B), the symbol determination table includes, for each determination result (per 2R high probability short / short, 2R high probability non-short / short, 15R high probability short / short A, 15R high probability short / short B, 15R low probability. The symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with the hourly time and JP big hit. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. Control to the 15R jackpot gaming state, and control to the high probability short-time state until the big hit again after the 15R jackpot gaming state ends, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 can determine that the state is a high probability state 15R high-probability short-time hit A for executing game effects
2. Control to the 15R jackpot gaming state, and after the 15R jackpot gaming state is finished, control to the high probability time-short state until the big hit is again, and it is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the high probability state. 15R high-probability short-time B for performing difficult game effects
3. Control to the 15R jackpot gaming state, and after the 15R jackpot gaming state is finished, the low probability time shortening until the predetermined number of times (100 times) of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed. 15R low-probability short-time control that controls the state and then controls the low-probability non-short-time state (normal state) and executes a game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the low-probability state. 4. The same control as the 2R big hit gaming state is executed in the first half of the 15R big hit gaming state, and after the 15R big hit gaming state is finished, the high probability short-time state is controlled, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the high probability state. JP jackpot that executes a game effect that can be discriminated. Control is made to the 2R jackpot gaming state, and after the 2R jackpot gaming state ends, the big probability is reached until the jackpot is reached again. 2R high-probability short-time play that can control whether the liquid crystal display 1400 is in a high-probability state in the liquid crystal display device 1400 6.2R big-hit gaming state is controlled, and the 2R big-hit gaming state ends 6 types of 2R high probability non-short-time hits that control the high-probability non-short-time state until the big hit is reached again and execute a game effect that makes it difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high-probability state. One of the big hits is decided.

  In this example, as the time-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time required for the normal symbol variable display control, the opening time of the movable piece 2005, etc. are controlled to the time-short state that is controlled in the same manner. However, the control content in the short-time state may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if 15R high probability short-term hit A, JP big hit, and 2R high probability short-term hit, the normal symbol executed after the end of the big hit gaming state is changed to the first short-time state where the variation time is 0.3 seconds. When the 15R high-probability short-time B and 15R low-probability short-time hit are reached, the normal symbol that is executed after the end of the big-hit gaming state is set to the time-short state where the variation time is 1 second longer than the first time-short state. By controlling, it may be controlled to the first time-short state that is more advantageous to the player and the second time-short state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time-short state.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In addition, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio determined to A per 15R high probability time shortening is higher than that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol. Thereby, when the start winning to the second starting port 2002 which is likely to occur when the control of the short time state is executed, the starting winning to the first starting port 2001 is more than that when the starting winning is generated. A big hit that can win many prize balls is generated.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when 15R high probability short-time A is determined, the first special symbol 15R high probability short-time per symbol is determined, and when 15R high probability short-time per B is determined, the first special symbol 15R is determined. If the symbol is determined to be a high probability short-term B symbol, if the 15R low-probability short-term symbol is determined, the first special symbol is determined to be the 15R low-probability short-term symbol, and if JP is a big jackpot, the first special symbol JP is determined. If the symbol is determined to be a winning symbol, the symbol is determined to be the 2R high-probability short-time symbol of the first special symbol. A high probability non-short-time symbol is determined. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be an off symbol as a mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S127).

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S128, the lottery result (the type of jackpot, reach losing or losing is indicated (the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol is indicated). The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the information may be transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S129, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 200, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), a plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (2R1-2R3 selected in the case of 2R jackpot, JP jackpot 2R1-2R3, specific 1-specific 3, non-specific 1-non-specific 3) selected in the case of the first special symbol normal processing step S102 of the processing group selection random number read in the table (Step S142) If the reach flag is set (Step S143), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (reach 1) When the table corresponding to the production group determination random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process is selected from the reach 3) (step S144), and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, If it is a normal deviation (a deviation where the reach effect is not executed), a variation pattern table at the time of the deviation is selected (step S145).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the board 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S148). As a result, effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 641 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 for the variation time thus determined.

  As shown in FIG. 201, a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a design random number (first design random number, second design random number). . The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a, among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, a table corresponding to the effect group determination random number read in step S102 of the first special design normal process. After the selection is made, the selected table is compared with the variable random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, and the variable time information associated with the read variable random number is obtained from this table. Then, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  In this example, a plurality of types of tables provided corresponding to one determination result are provided in accordance with the number of times pseudo fluctuation is executed. The pseudo variation means that the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays the decorative symbol multiple times in response to a single variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). In this example, a table with a high ratio of not performing pseudo fluctuation (reach 1, 2R1, specific 1, non-specific 1) and a table with a high ratio of executing pseudo fluctuation twice (reach 2, 2R2, specific 2, non-specific) 2) and three types of tables (reach 3, 2R3, specific 3, non-specific 3) for executing pseudo fluctuation three times. Also, pseudo variation is executed from among a plurality of variation pattern tables provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The ratio at which a table with a high ratio (for example, reach 3, 2R3, specific 3, non-specific 3) is selected is highest when A is per 15R high probability short time (134/241), and then 15R low probability short time Hit and 15R high probability short time per B (124/241), JP big hit and 2R big hit (118/241), reach is set in order (14/241). On the other hand, a pseudo variation is executed among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a design random number (first design random number, second design random number). The ratio at which a table with a low ratio (for example, reach 1, 2R1, specific 1, non-specific 1) is selected is highest when the reach is off (192/241), then JP big hit and 2R big hit (241 minutes) 72), 15R low-probability short-lived, 15R high-probability short-lived B (71/241), and 15R high-probability short-time A (62/241).

  In other words, in this example, a table (for example, 2R3, specific 3, non-specific 3) having a larger number of pseudo fluctuations than a case where a big hit is out of reach (reach out of reach) among a plurality of types of change pattern tables. ) Is selected so as to increase in proportion, and the proportion of selecting a table (for example, 2R3, specific 3, non-specific 3) having a large number of times of performing pseudo-variation in the order that becomes a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player is It is set to be high. Specifically, control is made to the 15R big hit gaming state and the high probability short-time state is controlled until the big hit is again made after the 15R big hit gaming state ends, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the high probability state. When the 15R high-probability short-time hit A is the most advantageous for the player by executing the discriminating game effect, the ratio of selecting the specific 3 table is the highest, and then the 15R big-hit gaming state is controlled to the 15R big-hit game state. 15R high-probability short-time hit B for controlling the high-probability short-time state until the big hit again after the end of the gaming state and executing a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the high-probability state. , And 15R jackpot gaming state, and after completion of the 15R jackpot gaming state, it is controlled to a low probability short-time state. 15R for controlling to a low probability non-short-time state (normal state) when the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times. In the first half of the jackpot gaming state, the same control as the 2R jackpot gaming state is executed, and after the 15R jackpot gaming state is finished, the high probability short-time state is controlled, and it is determined that the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the high probability state. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, a high probability is controlled in the high probability time-short state until the big hit is made again after the 2R big hit gaming state is controlled. 2R high-probability short-time hit and 2R big-hit gaming state are controlled to execute a game effect that can be identified as a state, and the 2R big-hit gaming state ends. In the case of the 2R high-probability non-short-time hit for controlling the high-probability non-short-time state until the big hit again, and executing the game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid-crystal display device 1400 is in the high-probability state. Are set in the order of 2R3 table selection ratio. In other words, when more pseudo fluctuations are executed, the percentage of big hits is high and the percentage of more advantageous big hits is high. Therefore, since the expectation for the big hit can be given according to the number of pseudo fluctuations and the expectation for the more advantageous big hit (for example, 15R high probability short-term hit A) can be given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in this example, after the big hit gaming state, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes having different display modes (background color, background mode, decorative pattern mode, etc.). There are multiple types of performance modes depending on the gaming state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state, low probability short-time state, low probability non-time-short state (normal state)) and the type of jackpot. The production effect is improved by controlling the production mode corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state. Specifically, as the production mode, it is executed when the high probability short-time state is controlled after the end of A per 15R high-probability short-time, after the end of JP jackpot, and after the end of 2R high-probability short-time. This is executed when the control is performed in the high probability determination mode in which it is possible to discriminate whether or not, the low probability short-time state after the end of 15R low-probability short time and the high probability short-time state after the end of B per 15R high-probability short-time. It is executed when controlling to the probabilistic state, in the indeterminate short time mode where it is difficult to determine that the control is in the stochastic state, and to the high probability non-time short state after the end of 2R high probability non-short time short, and to control to the high probability state It is executed when controlling to the indeterminate non-short-time mode in which it is difficult to discriminate, and the low-probability non-time-short state (normal state), and has the normal mode capable of determining that it is controlling to the low-probability state . In the peripheral control ROM 4140b of the peripheral control board 4140, a control program that is executed in response to a command (specifically, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 4100 and instructing the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. There are several for each mode. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a command (variation pattern command) for instructing the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has received the control program of a plurality of types corresponding to the current effect mode. By controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the control program corresponding to the command, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the rendering mode is controlled.

  In this example, the production group determination random number and the variable random number are acquired at the time of starting winning. However, at the time of starting winning, the effect group determining random number to be used at least in the effect predetermination process (step S46) is acquired. Any variation random number may be used, and the variation random number may be acquired when the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) is executed.

  Also, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, whether or not the counter value of the short time counter in which the continuation number of the low probability short time state is set is “0” in the next step S149. Judging. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S150), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S151). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the control in the low probability time reduction state is ended is set (step S152).

  If it is determined in the process of step S149 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in step S151 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, then Then, the process proceeds to step S153. When the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S153), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 203, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display 641 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185) when the time reduction completion flag is set (step S183). As a result, the control in the low-probability short-time state is terminated and the control in the low-probability non-short-time state (normal state) is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set and the hourly flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is set to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. When the process is updated so as to be transferred (step S190), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. The jackpot type (15R high probability short-time per A, 15R high probability short-time per B, 15R low probability short-time per short, JP big hit per 2R high-probability short-time per short 2R high probability non-short-time per short). In step S187, the jackpot start command corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R high probability short-time A, 15R high probability short-time B, 15R low-probability short-time per, JP big hit, 2R high-probability short-time per, 2R high-probability non-short-time hit) (15R high probability short time per A start command, 15R high probability short time per B start command, 15R low probability short time per short start command, 2R high probability short time per short start command, 2R high probability short time per short start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp / LED, the speakers 121, 391, and the like.

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the big hit control process (step S39). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot control process flag.

1. When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests “big hit”, the game will shift to the above big hit gaming state, etc. Pre-opening process for a special prize opening that waits until notification to the player is performed by the peripheral board 4010 (step S91).
2. When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "big hit", the above-mentioned prize winning opening 2003 is opened. Controlled open big opening opening process (step S92)
3. The big winning opening opening post-process that waits until the peripheral board 4010 notifies the player that the big hit gaming state is over (step S93).

  The jackpot control process flag is operated to indicate that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 189).

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S91).

  When the jackpot control process flag indicates that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening should be performed, as shown in FIG. 205, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S201. 1 is subtracted from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the special winning opening 2003 is opened to determine whether the interval timer is 0, that is, whether the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed (step). S202).

  When the standby time set in the interval timer elapses, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a round start command indicating that a big hit gaming state round is started (step S204). The round start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. The type of jackpot (15R high probability short-time A, 15R high probability short-time B, 15R low probability short-time per short, JP big hit, 2R high probability short-time per 2R It is prepared individually according to the high probability non-time-short) and the round to be executed. In step S204, the types of jackpots (A per 15R high-probability short-time, B per 15R high-probability short-time, 15R low-probability short-time, JP big-batch, 2R high-probability short-time per, 2R high-probability non-short-time per) and the round to be executed A round start command corresponding to one round (1R) is set. As a result, the type of jackpot instructed by the round start command and the effect of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to one round (1R) are executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp / LED, the speakers 121, 391, and the like.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the number of round executions according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot (15R high probability short-time A, 15R high probability short-time B, 15R low-probability short-time, JP jackpot) If it is "15 times", 2R big hit (2R high probability short-time hit, 2R high probability non-short-time short hit) "2 times") is set in the release counter (step S205), the release according to the type of big hit If it is time (time from controlling the big winning opening 2003 to the open state to controlling it to the closed state: 15R big hit (15R high probability short-time A, 15R high probability short-time B, 15R low probability short-time short) 30s (30 seconds) ", and JP big hit and 2R big hit (per 2R high probability short time per 2R high probability non-short time short)" 300ms (0.3 seconds) ") is set to the open timer. Tosuru (step S206).

  When the above setting process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 decrements the release counter by 1 (step S210), and sets the entrance counter for counting the number of entrances to the big winning opening 2003 to 0. (Step S211), the special winning opening 2003 is controlled to be opened (Step S212). After that, when the above-mentioned big hit control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the process for opening the big prize opening (step S92), this process is ended.

  When it is determined that the interval timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the standby time set in the interval timer has not elapsed, the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

  FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S92). Note that this special winning opening opening process is executed when the round game is repeatedly executed.

  When the jackpot control process flag indicates that the process during opening of the big prize opening should be performed, as shown in FIG. 206, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S221. Then, based on the detection signal from the count sensor 2014, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2003. Then, on the condition that there is this entry, as a process of step S222, the entry counter that counts the number of game balls entering into the big winning opening 2003 as a counter value is counted up, and the value of the entry counter is If it is 10 or more (step S223), the process proceeds to step S226, and processing for ending the round is performed.

  If the value of the winning counter is less than 10, the opening timer is decremented by 1 (step S224), and the opening timer value is 0, that is, the opening time of the big winning opening 2003 set in the opening timer has elapsed. In such a case (step S225), the special winning opening 2003 is controlled to be closed (step S226). Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the number of executions of the round set when the release counter is 0, that is, when the big hit is started, is finished (step S227).

  When the release counter is 0, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit end command (step S229). The jackpot end command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010, and the jackpot type (15R high probability short time per A, 15R high probability short time per B, 15R low probability short time per short, JP big hit, 2R high probability short time per short, 2R It is prepared individually according to high probability non-short-time per).

  In step S229, when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state, the jackpot end command corresponding to the type of 15R jackpot (15R high probability short-time per A, 15R high probability short-time per B, 15R low probability short-time per short, JP big hit) is set. When the 2R jackpot gaming state is to be ended, a jackpot end command corresponding to the type of 2R jackpot (2R high probability short-time hit, 2R high probability non-short-time hit) is set. As a result, an effect when the jackpot gaming state according to the jackpot type is ended is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp / LED, the speakers 121, 391, and the like.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets an end waiting time according to the type of jackpot in the interval timer (step S230), and the process shifts to the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S93). When the above jackpot control process flag is updated (step S231), this process is terminated.

  If the open / close counter is not 0 in step S227, a round end command is set (step S235). The round end command is a command transmitted to the peripheral board 4010. The type of jackpot (15R high probability short-time A, 15R high probability short-time B, 15R low probability short-time short, JP big hit, 2R high probability short-time per 2R It is prepared individually according to high probability non-short-time) and round to be finished. In step S235, depending on the type of jackpot (A per 15R high probability short-time, B per 15R high-probability short-time, 15R low-probability short-time, JP big-bonus, 2R high-probability short-time per short, 2R high-probability non-short-time per) Set a round end command. Thereby, the jackpot gaming state effect according to the type of jackpot designated by the round end command and the round to be finished is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp / LED and the speakers 121, 391, and the like.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the round standby time according to the type of jackpot (the time from when the big prize opening 2003 is controlled to the closed state until the big prize opening 2003 is controlled to be opened again). Is set in the interval timer (step S236), and when the above-mentioned big hit control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the post-winning-game opening opening process (step S93) (step S231), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S225 that the release timer is not 0, that is, the release time set in the release timer has not elapsed, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when a timer interrupt occurs next time, the special winning opening releasing process is executed again.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, the release time set in the release timer has elapsed, and the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 2003 is a predetermined number (in this example, 10 The round in progress is terminated when one of the points reached is established. That is, when the opening time set in the opening timer has elapsed, and when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening 2003 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example), it is determined that the condition for ending the round is satisfied. Then, the process of ending the running round is performed. In the 2R big hit game state, when the number of game balls entering the winning prize opening 2003 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example), it is determined that the round end condition is not satisfied and is released. It may be determined that the round end condition is satisfied only when the open time set in the timer has elapsed, and the currently executed round may be ended.

  FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the post-opening processing for the special winning opening (step S93).

  When the jackpot control process flag indicates that the processing after the big winning opening is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S251. 1 is subtracted from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the special winning opening 2003 is opened to determine whether the interval timer is 0, that is, whether the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed (step). S252). If the interval timer is not 0, it is determined that the standby time set in the interval timer has not elapsed, and the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed and the value of the release counter is 0 (step S253), and is not per 2R high probability non-short time (Step S254), a time reduction flag is set (Step S255), and if it is around 15R low probability time reduction, an initial value (100 times in this example) is set to a time reduction number counter (Step S257). Thereafter, the big hit flag and the big hit in-progress flag are reset (step S258), and when the above-mentioned big hit control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the initial value of the big winning opening release pre-processing (step S91) (step S91). S260), this process is terminated.

  Also, if the open counter is not 0 in step S253, the type of big hit (15R high probability short-time A, 15R high probability short-time B, 15R low probability short-time short, JP big hit, 2R high probability short-time short, 2R high probability A round start command corresponding to the round to be executed and the round to be executed is set (step S262). And if the opening time according to the type of big hit (15R big hit (15R high probability short time per A, 15R high probability short time per B, 15R low probability short time per short) "30s (30 seconds)", 2R big hit (2R high If the probability short-time per 2R high probability non-time-short per time), “300 ms (0.3 seconds)”) is set in the release timer (step S263). Also, the open counter is decremented by 1 (step S266), and the special winning opening 2003 is controlled to be open (step S267). Thereafter, when the above-mentioned big hit control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the process for opening the big prize opening (step S92) (step S268), this process is ended.

  By updating the big hit control process flag so that the process shifts to the process for opening the big prize opening in step S268, the process for opening the big prize opening is executed when the next timer interruption occurs. Further, in the process for opening the big prize opening, the big hit control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the process after opening the big prize opening based on the completion condition of the round. In other words, in the big hit gaming state, after executing the first round (one round) based on the contents set in the pre-opening process for the big winning opening and executing the first round (one round), the post-opening process for the big winning opening and the large By repeatedly executing the winning opening opening process, the big hit gaming state round is executed a plurality of times.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main control MPU 4100a determines the probability variable flag when ending the 15R high probability short-time A, 15R high probability short-time B, JP big hit, 2R high-probability short-time hit, and 2R high-probability short-time hit. Is set, and when the 15R low-probability time-shortening is finished, the probability variation flag is reset. Then, in step S111 of the big hit determination process (step S105), the state of the probability variation flag is confirmed. If the probability variation flag is set, it is determined whether or not to win using the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability. Thereby, it is possible to switch between low probability state control and high probability state control to control each gaming state.

  Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 208, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process for counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses when 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then a 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1400, the lamp / LED, the speakers 121, 391, and the like based on the command received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis processing in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S602, the liquid crystal is based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Control processing related to the display device 1400 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 121 and 391 is executed. In the lamp control process in step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3031 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, a pre-read random number and a mode change determination random number) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. Is not something For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

[6. Pre-reading notice]
Next, the pre-reading notice executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control board 4100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 and 212. FIG. Here, the pre-reading notice will be described. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the hold display areas 1400a to 1400h (first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d, second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h) based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control board 4100. ) By controlling either of the first holding mode indicating a state where there is no corresponding holding ball and the second holding mode indicating a state where there is a corresponding holding ball, Displays the number of reserved special symbols. This second hold mode includes a plurality of modes depending on the degree of possibility of being a big hit, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the hold display areas 1400a to 1400h based on the reception of the hold number command. When the area is controlled to the second hold mode, it is determined whether to pre-read notice and whether to display the area corresponding to the pre-read notice in the second hold mode and decide to pre-read notice In such a case, the display of the corresponding areas of the hold display areas 1400a to 1400h in the mode determined in the second hold mode is notified in advance of the possibility of a big hit.

  FIG. 210 is a prefetch determination table used for determining whether to perform a prefetch notice and determining the type of prefetch notice when the prefetch notice is executed. In this example, a prefetch determination table is used for determining whether or not to execute a prefetch notice for each gaming state and for each predetermination information and determining the type of the prefetch notice. Specifically, as the pre-reading determination table used when the gaming state is a low probability non-time-short state and a high probability non-time-short state, the pre-determination information (disconnected, reach 1 to reach 3, 2R1 to 2R3, unspecified 1 to non A table corresponding to each of specific 3, specific 1 to specific 3) is provided, and pre-determined information (disconnected, reach 1 to reach 3, 2R1 to 2R3, A table corresponding to each of non-specific 1 to non-specific 3, specific 1 to specific 3) is provided, and as a table to be used when the gaming state is a high-probability short-time state, prior determination information (disconnected, reach 1 to reach 3, A table corresponding to each of 2R1 to 2R3, non-specific 1 to non-specific 3, specific 1 to specific 3) is provided.

  In this example, when the pre-reading notice is not executed, a black circle is displayed as the plurality of types of second holding modes, and when the pre-reading notice is executed, the yellow type is displayed as the plurality of types of second holding modes. One of the seven types of triangles, red triangle, white triangle, gold triangle, diamond, star, and heart is displayed. In the low-probability short-time state and the high-probability short-time state, only a diamond, a star, or a heart is displayed as a look-ahead notice state. In the high-probability short-time state, a loss (including a reach failure) may occur. The pre-reading notice is executed only when the probability is short hit A. In the low-probability short-time state, a diamond is displayed as a pre-reading notice only when a loss occurs or 15R big hit (15R low-probability short-time, 15R high-probability short-time A, 15R high-probability short-time B). In the low-probability non-short-time state and the high-probability non-time-short state, a red triangle is displayed only when the pseudo variation is executed twice or more, and a white triangle is displayed only when the pseudo variation is executed three times. Then, a gold triangle is displayed only when the pseudo fluctuation is executed three times and A per 15R high-probability short-time. In addition, a diamond is displayed as a pre-reading notice only when it is out of place or when it becomes 15R big hit (15R low probability short time per short, 15R high probability short time per A, 15R high probability short time per B). Further, a heart is displayed as a pre-reading notice only when the reach is lost or when the A is 15R high probability short-time hit. Thereby, the expectation with respect to 15R big hit gaming state can be changed according to the kind of the 2nd reservation mode displayed.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability short-time state, the reach may be out of order (may include a case of loss), or 15R low-probability short-time or 15R high-probability short-time B Alternatively, in the case of 15R low probability, the pre-reading notice for displaying the corresponding area in the hold display areas 1400a to 1400h in a specific mode (for example, skull) may be executed. In other words, in the low probability non-short-time state (normal state), the player expects to generate 15R big hit, while in the high-probability short-time state, the player wants to continue the high-probability short-time state, and the 15R high-probability short-time occurrence occurs. In order to play a game with the aim of losing the game, it is possible to reach a 15R low-probability short-lived state (in this example), which ends the high-probability short-time state by controlling the low-probability short-time state after the end of the big hit gaming state. If the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed with one fluctuating decorative symbol sequence stopped at the same even symbol that forms part of the 15R low-probability short-term symbol, expect. By using such a player's psychological state and notifying that there is a possibility of 15R low-probability short-lived before executing a reach that may be 15R low-probability short-lived as a look-ahead notice, You can change your entertainment interests.

  In this example, the combination of the same even number of symbols is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, both in the case of B per 15R high probability short time and in the case of 15R low probability short time per hit, After the end of B per 15R high-probability short time and after the end of 15R low-probability short-time, display control is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 in a manner in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is controlled to a high probability state (in this example, a high probability state) In this case, the hold display area is used not only in the case of the out-of-range and short per 15R low probability but also in the case of B per 15R high probability short time. In the case where 1400a to 1400h is configured to execute a pre-reading notice to display a corresponding region in a specific mode (for example, skull), but when B becomes 15R high probability short-time B You may not perform the look-ahead warning to display the corresponding region of the hold display area 1400a~1400h in a particular manner. However, even in the case of 15R high probability short-time B, a pre-reading notice is displayed to display the corresponding area in the reserved display areas 1400a to 1400h in a specific manner (for example, skull), and the high-probability short-time after the end of the big hit gaming state A pre-reading notice that displays the corresponding area in a specific form (for example, skull) by executing the grasp that the possibility of being controlled by the state is not completely lost is executed. Thus, even if it is a big hit, it can be avoided that the player is excessively discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the gaming interest.

If the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the command analysis process and receives the hold number command, the peripheral control MPU 4140a acquires the prefetch random number from a counter that updates the prefetch random number used for the lottery regarding the prefetch notice, and the acquired prefetch random number and the current By comparing the gaming state and the pre-reading determination table corresponding to the pre-determination information specified by the received hold number command, the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice and the type of the pre-read notice are determined. Then, display control is performed in a manner in which an area corresponding to the hold ball designated by the received hold number command among the hold display areas 1400a to 1400h is determined.

In this example, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines any of the plurality of types of second holding modes as a yellow display triangle, a red display triangle, a white display triangle, and a gold display triangle, these determinations are made. After the result is stored in the storage area of the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a yellow triangle is first displayed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs lottery to determine whether or not to change the display mode every time a predetermined condition is established, and changes the mode according to the lottery result. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the special symbol (first special symbol indicator 641, second special symbol indicator 642) every time the game ball enters the warp entrance 2302 and the special symbol (first special symbol indicator 642). A mode change determination random number is extracted from the counter that updates the mode change determination random number every time the variation display of the special symbol and the second special symbol) is started, and the extracted mode change determination random number and the mode change determination table shown in FIG. The display mode (display color in this example) is changed by comparing the warp passing mode change determination table shown in FIG. 211 (A) and the fluctuation start mode change determination table shown in FIG. 211 (B). A lottery of whether or not.

  That is, when the detection signal from the warp entry detection sensor 2302a is input, the peripheral control MPU 4140a extracts the mode change determination random number from the counter that updates the mode change determination random number, and extracts the mode change determination random number and the extracted mode change determination random number as shown in FIG. Of the warp passage mode change determination table shown in A), the mode (display color) determined based on the pre-read random number and the pre-read determination table is compared with a table corresponding to the current display mode (display color). If it is determined that the display mode is to be changed, a corresponding one of the hold display areas (first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d, second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h) is selected. The hold display area is changed to the display mode determined based on the warp passing mode change determination table and the mode change determination random number.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the variation pattern command, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the mode change determination from the counter that updates the mode change determination random number before starting the variation display of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the variation pattern command. Random numbers are extracted, and the mode (display color) determined based on the extracted mode change determination random number and the pre-read random number and the pre-read determination table in the variation start mode change determination table shown in FIG. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the display mode by comparing with a table corresponding to the current display mode (display color), and when it is determined that the display mode is to be changed, a hold display area (first hold display area 1400a). -1400d, second hold display area 1400e-1400h) when shifting the display, the hold display area (first hold display area 400A～1400d, changing the second hold display area 1400e~1400h display mode determined based on the corresponding hold display area variation start mode change decision table and mode change determination random number of).

  If it is determined that the display mode is to be changed as a result of the determination as to whether or not the display mode is changed based on the game ball entering the warp entrance 2302, the display control MPU 4140a immediately displays a hold display. The corresponding hold display area among the areas (first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d, second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h) is changed to the display mode determined based on the warp passage mode change determination table and the mode change determination random number. To do. By configuring in this way, not only the display result of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also whether or not the holding display area changes when the game ball enters the warp entrance 2302 Can also be noticed. In addition, in order to determine whether or not to change the display mode based on the game ball entering the warp entrance 2302, the number of the first special symbol and the number of the second special symbol are maximized. Even if it has reached, the player can operate the operation handle portion 461 to aim the game ball into the warp entrance 302 and can drive the game ball into the game area 605. That is, it is possible to prevent stoppage when the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols reach the maximum value.

  In addition, as a result of determining whether or not to change the display mode performed based on the reception of the variation pattern command, when it is determined to change the display mode, a hold display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 Among the hold display areas (first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d, second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h) when shifting the display of the first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d and the second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h The corresponding hold display area is changed to a display mode determined based on the change start mode change determination table and the mode change determination random number. By configuring in this way, not only the display result of the decorative symbol variable display executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400, but also the hold display area indicating the hold ball that has not been started yet and has been put on hold. It can also be noted whether or not changes. In this example, it is configured to determine whether or not to change the display mode based on the fact that a game ball has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the fact that the variation pattern command has been received. It may be configured to execute.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 211, in this example, there are four display modes of a yellow display triangle, a red display triangle, a white display triangle, and a gold display triangle, and it is determined that the display mode is to be changed. The yellow display triangle → red display triangle → predetermined as the upper limit of the display mode (display color) determined based on the pre-read random number and the pre-read determination table among the four display modes The display mode of the corresponding hold display area among the hold display areas (the first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d and the second hold display areas 1400e to 1400h) is displayed next in accordance with the display order of the triangle of white display to the triangle of gold display. It is configured to change to a display mode determined so as to be displayed (for example, in the case of a yellow display triangular display mode, a red display triangular display mode one level above). In other words, the display mode is changed in accordance with a predetermined display order, and when it is determined that the display mode is to be changed, the display mode of an arbitrary display order is skipped and the display mode of the display order of two or more stages ahead is displayed. Do not change to. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game aiming at the entry of a game ball into the warp entrance 2302 over a long period of time. If special change conditions are met, such as when the result of the variable display of the corresponding hold display area is a big hit, the display mode of any display order is skipped and the display order of two or more stages is displayed. You may make it change into a mode.

  Further, the display order of the yellow display triangle, the red display triangle, the white display triangle, and the gold display triangle determined in advance based on the prefetch random number and the prefetch determination table is the display mode after the display order. It is set so that the advantage to the player becomes higher as it is displayed. Specifically, the yellow display triangle is displayed even when the pseudo variation is not executed, whereas the red display triangle is displayed only when the pseudo variation is executed twice or more, and the white display triangle is displayed. Then, it is displayed only when the pseudo variation is executed three times, and the gold display triangle is displayed only when the pseudo variation is executed three times and the big hit is achieved. In addition, as described above, the larger the number of times of performing pseudo-variation, the higher the ratio of winning big wins that are advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player is displayed as the later display mode is displayed. The advantage for is high.

  Also, in this example, a predetermined display area (first hold display areas 1400a to 1400d, second hold display, in accordance with a predetermined display order of yellow display triangle → red display triangle → white display triangle → gold display triangle). The display mode of the corresponding hold display area among the areas 1400e to 1400h) is configured to change to the forward direction (next display order), but the change to the reverse direction (previous display order) and the forward direction (next display order) It may be executed in combination with a change to (display order). That is, when it is determined that the display mode is to be changed, it is determined whether to change the display mode in the forward direction, which is the next display order, or to change the display mode in the backward direction. You may make it display-control. With this configuration, whether a display mode with high advantage (display mode of the next display order) is displayed or a display mode with low advantage (display mode of the previous display order) is displayed. It can attract attention and improve interest.

  As described above, when the plurality of types of second holding modes are determined as one of the yellow display triangle, the red display triangle, the white display triangle, and the gold display triangle, First, after displaying the yellow display triangle with the lowest advantage, a lottery result indicating that the display mode is changed by selecting whether or not to change the display mode each time a predetermined condition is established. In order to change the display mode to a display mode (for example, when the current display mode is a yellow-displayed triangle), the pre-read random number and the pre-read are changed. Even if the display mode that is determined in advance based on the determination table is a triangular with yellow display that has the lowest advantage, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a change in the display mode. Don't be discouraged.

  As shown in FIG. 212, when both the number of holds of the first special symbol and the number of holds of the second special symbol are “0”, the hold display areas 1400a to 1400h are displayed in the first hold mode (dotted line circle display). Control (FIG. 212 (A)), and the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved special second symbols are both “0”, and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change If it is determined that the pre-reading notice is not to be executed when the start winning to the first start port 2001 occurs during the display and the number of the first special symbol hold is “1”, the first hold display area 1400a is displayed as a black circle. And display control is performed on the other hold display areas 1400b to 1400h in the first hold mode (FIG. 212B). It should be noted that the second start port 2001 is displayed when the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are both “0” and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed. The second hold display area 1400e is controlled to be displayed with a black circle even when it is determined that a start winning prize has occurred and the number of hold of the second special symbol is “1” and the pre-reading notice is not executed. Display control is performed on the display areas 1400a to 1400d and 1400f to 1400h in the first hold mode. In addition, when the number of retained first special symbols is “2”, a start winning for the first special symbol 2001 occurs and the number of retained first special symbols becomes “3”, and display control is performed in a star manner. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice is to be executed, the pre-reading notice is executed by controlling the display of the first hold display area 1400c corresponding to the hold ball in a star shape (FIG. 212 (C)).

  In addition, as described above, in this example, control is performed so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is digested in preference to the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Further, in the above-mentioned short-time state (high probability short-time state, low probability short-time state), the start winning to the second starting port 2002 is increased more than the non-short-time state (low-probability non-short-time state, high-probability non-short-time state). The ratio of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is higher than that of the first special symbol. In addition, when the gaming state is a short-time state (low probability non-time short state, high probability non-time short state), if a start prize is given to the first start port 2001 and a pre-reading notice is executed, a high expectation that will be a big hit is on hold Necessary because it is possible to generate a large number of start wins to the second start port 2002 with the ball held (stock) and aim for a big hit, and it is possible to generate a big hit multiple times in a short time There is a risk of increasing euphoria. Therefore, in this example, when control is performed in a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) in which the start winning to the second start port 2002 is increased, a pre-reading advance notice related to the start winning of the second special symbol Is controlled not to be executed (FIG. 212D). In addition, when the gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state), a pre-reading advance notice related to the first special symbol starting prize and a pre-reading notice related to the second special symbol starting prize And both can be executed. The jackpot gaming state occurred as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol while both the pre-reading notice related to the starting winning of the first special symbol and the pre-reading notice related to the starting winning of the second special symbol were executed. Sometimes the first special symbol of the first special symbol is controlled despite the fact that it is controlled to the short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) after the big hit gaming state by ending the pre-reading notice related to the start winning of the first special symbol It is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice related to the start winning prize from being executed.

  In addition, when it is configured to digest the reserved balls in the order in which the start winnings occur (sequential variation) without executing the variation display of the second special symbol in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol, Since it is difficult to put a holding ball with a high expectation that will be a big hit into a holding state (stock), even if the gaming state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) A pre-reading notice related to the start winning prize may be executed.

[7. Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The liquid crystal display device 1400 in this embodiment is an effect display means in the present invention, the character unit 3400 in this embodiment is a movable decorative body unit in the present invention, and the character body 3402 in this embodiment is a decorative body in the present invention. The head 3402a in the embodiment corresponds to the upper decorative body in the present invention, and the body portion 3402b in the present embodiment corresponds to the lower decorative body in the present invention. In addition, the body part slit 3413f of the lower guide member 3413 in the present embodiment is a lower guide part and a guide hole in the present invention, and the head support arm 3416 in the present embodiment is an upper rotation support part in the present invention. The body portion support arm 3417 in the present embodiment is the lower rotation support portion in the present invention, the head slit 3426a of the slope member 3426 in the present embodiment is in the upper guide portion and the guide hole in the present invention, and the head portion in the present embodiment. The sliding shaft 3453c of the support member 3453 and the sliding shaft 3480c of the trunk lower support member 3480 correspond to the insertion pins in the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ninja character moves from the vicinity of the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1400 visible through the opening 600e of the game panel 600 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the game state. Since the character body 3402 that is three-dimensionally shaped moves to the left and is positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction, the movable decorative body in the conventional pachinko machine Compared to the above, the three-dimensional movement that not only moves in the left-right direction but also rotates, so that the movement (movable effect) of the decoration body (character body 3402) that has never been seen can be shown to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to get tired of the movement of the character body 3402 and to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced by attracting the player's interest strongly. It is possible.

  Further, the character body 3402 in which a ninja character is three-dimensionally shaped is moved in the left-right direction and rotated about the vertical axis, and the character body 3402 that can be seen from the player side by the movement of the character body 3402 is visible. The direction of the character body 3402 changes depending on the player's viewing position, timing, etc., and the player's fresh feeling of the character body 3402 (decorated body) can be maintained and tired. It is possible to prevent the interest in games from being reduced.

  Furthermore, a character body 3402 in which a ninja character is three-dimensionally moved moves from the vicinity of the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the left according to the gaming state and is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and around the vertical axis. Since it is rotated, a part of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is blocked by the character body 3402, making it easy for the player to notice the movement of the character body 3402 and the player. By noticing the movement of the character body 3402, attention can be paid to the movable character body 3402, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the character body 3402 and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, a unit that supports a slide base 3414 (movable side) that three-dimensionally forms a ninja character and separately supports a character body 3402 divided into a head portion 3402a and a torso portion 3402b so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The base 3411 (fixed side) is provided with a head slit 3426a and a body slit 3413f extending in a direction different from the moving direction of the slide base 3414, and a head slit 3426a is provided at the head 3402a and the body 3402b. And slide shafts 3453c and 3480c guided by the body slit 3413f, and when the slide base 3414 is moved in the left-right direction together with the character body 3402, the upper and lower slide shafts 3453c and 3480c are respectively heads. Slit 3426a, body part slit 3413 Its longitudinal position by being guided change to head 3402a and the body portion 3402b is possible to respectively different rotated about its axis. Accordingly, since the character body 3402 divided into the head 3402a and the body part 3402b moves differently, the character body 3402 can be moved with higher appealing power. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interests, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to difficulty in getting bored.

  Further, as described above, the character body 3402 can be rotated without providing the slide base 3414 or the character body 3402 with a driving means for rotating the character body 3402. Only can relieve restrictions on the size and shape of the character body 3402, and the character body 3402 can have a more impactful three-dimensional shape. Further, instead of the driving means for rotating, a head movable mechanism 3450, a torso movable mechanism 3470, a character body decoration board 3432, a head decoration board 3456, a torso decoration board 3482, and the like can be further provided. Therefore, the character body 3402 that can make the player more entertaining or surprised can be obtained, and both the movable production and the light emission production of the character body 3402 are enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. In addition to being able to be suppressed, the character body 3402 having a high impact can be obtained, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play by attracting the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the sliding shafts 3453c and 3480c are guided by being inserted into the long hole-shaped head slit 3426a and the body portion slit 3413f that penetrated, and the sliding shafts 3453c and 3480c are slit in some vibrations. The sliding shafts 3453c and 3480c and the slits 3426a and 3413f can be maintained without slipping out of the sliding shafts 3426a and 3413f, so that the sliding shafts 3453c and 3480c are surely guided by the slits 3426a and 3413f. Can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to surely entertain the moving effect by the character body 3402 and suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced. can do.

  In addition, the head 3402a and the torso 3402b of the character body 3402 are rotated differently, and the head 3402a is rotated so as to face the player. The character body 3402 can be attracted with a strong interest, the movement of the character body 3402 can be enjoyed, and the movement of the character body 3402 can increase the expectation for the game. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the lifting mechanism 3150 of the upper unit 3002 arranged in the arrangement range above the inner periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged in the game area 605, When the pair of arcuate slide members 3152 arranged symmetrically with respect to the movement axis extending in the vertical direction through the approximate center of the game area 605 move along the arcuate slide axis according to the gaming state, The rotating decorative body unit 3100 supported on one end side of the slide member 3152 moves along the movement axis from the inner periphery of the center accessory 2300, that is, from the raised retracted position to the advanced position lowered. Each of the slide members 3152 extends so as to substantially follow the movement trajectory of the rotary decorative body unit 3100, so that it is like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the decorative body is supported and moved by the arm member (corresponding to the slide member) from the direction intersecting (substantially orthogonal) to the moving direction of the decorative body, it moves together with the rotary decorative body unit 3100. It becomes possible to make the slide member 3152 inconspicuous, relatively make the rotating decorative body unit 3100 stand out, and make it possible to enjoy the movement of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can. On the other hand, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 moved up and down by the lifting mechanism 3150 rotates outside the outer periphery of the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114 when the first rotating member 3112 is rotated by the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106. Since a part of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3102 protrudes, the appearance of the rotating decorative body 3102 including the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114 changes greatly, which can surprise the player and rotate A change in the decoration body 3102 makes it possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the appearance of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is greatly changed by projecting the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3102 from the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114, the rotating decorative body 3102 that moves and rotates is movable. It is possible to increase the impact of the production, make it easier to notice the movable production by the rotary decoration body unit 3102, and to make the player pay attention to the rotation decoration body 3102 and to enjoy the movable production. Interest can be strongly attracted, and this pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  Further, the pair of slide members 3152 for moving the rotating decorative body unit 3100 extend along an arcuate slide axis extending inward from the inner periphery of the center accessory 2300. In other words, the slide members 3152 Is formed in an arc shape with a constant curvature, so that compared to the case where the rack gear (corresponding to a slide member) is formed in a straight line as in the prior art, the center of the center accessory 2300 (game area 605) in the arrangement range Even if the arrangement space in the radially extending direction around the center is narrow, the slide member 3152 can be made longer by bending the slide member 3152, and the moving range of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 can be made as long as possible. Can be enjoyed by the rotating decorative body unit 3100 that moves greatly, It can be suppressed to below.

  Further, since the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is supported by the pair of slide members 3152, the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is provided with a rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, a first rotating member 3112, a second rotating member 3114, and a plurality of rotating decorative body units 3100. Even if the rotating ornament body 3102 and the rotation lock mechanism 3126 are provided, the rotating ornament body unit 3100 can be moved without any problem, and the moving rotating ornament body unit 3100 can be smoothly moved without being greatly shaken. It is possible to move the rotating decorative body unit 3100 that can be moved and to enhance the interest of the player, and it is possible to prevent problems associated with the movement of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 from occurring. To prevent the game from being interrupted due to the occurrence of a malfunction and the player's interest to decline It can be. Accordingly, the rotating decorative body 3102 can be moved and supported without any problem in the vertical direction, and supported by the pair of slide members 3152 from both sides of the rotational decorative body unit 3100. Therefore, the rotational decorative body drive motor 3106 is supported. Even if a reaction force due to the rotation of the first rotating member 3112 or the like acts on the slide member 3152 side from the rotating decorative body unit 3100, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 may be shaken or distorted sufficiently against the reaction force. It is possible to prevent this, and it is possible to entertain the movable effect of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 without a sense of incongruity, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since at least a part of the slide member 3152 is arranged in the arrangement range between the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and the inner periphery of the center accessory 2300 in a front view, the game panel 600 and the center accessory By configuring 2300 with an opaque material, the slide member 3152 and the like disposed within the arrangement range can be made invisible from the player side. Therefore, the first slide holding member 3154, the second slide holding member 3156, the pinion gear 3158, the lifting drive motor 3160, and the like that hold or move the slide member 3152 are disposed within the arrangement range or rotated. When the decorative body unit 3100 is in the raised position, the slide member 3152 and the elevating mechanism 3150 can be made difficult to see from the player side by arranging substantially the entire slide member 3152 within the arrangement range. The appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the slide member 3152 extends along an arc-shaped slide axis extending substantially on the surface of the game panel 600, that is, the slide member 3152 extends substantially along the surface of the game panel 600. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the slide member 3152 as small as possible, so that the depth dimension of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from increasing, and this pachinko machine 1 can be used in the existing game hall. Can be installed on island facilities without problems.

  Further, a long hole-shaped unit support hole 3152a is provided on one end side of the pair of slide members 3512 in the lifting mechanism 3150 of the upper unit 3002, and the rotary decorative body unit base 3104 of the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is provided in the unit support hole 3152a. Since the pair of slide members 3152 arranged symmetrically with respect to the movement axis moves in the sliding direction, the distance between one end sides of the pair of slide members 3152 Even if the angle changes, the support pin 3136 supported by the support portion 3104b of the rotary ornament body unit base 3104 slides inside the long hole-shaped unit support hole 3152a, so that the orientation of the rotary ornament body unit does not change. 3100 can be supported and rotated by a pair of slide members 3152 The Kazaritai unit 3100 can be reliably moved along the movement axis.

  Further, when the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is in the raised position (retracted position), the holding magnet 3166 of the lifting mechanism 3150 and the iron motor case of the rotary ornament body drive motor 3106 in the rotary ornament body unit 3100 are magnetically attached by magnetic force. The magnetic ornamentation can assist the holding of the rotary ornament body unit 3100 positioned at the raised position with a simple configuration, can prevent the lifting mechanism 3150 from becoming large, and slide the slide member 3152. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the lifting drive motor 3160, the rack gear 3152b, and the pinion gear 3158, and the durability of the lifting mechanism 3150 can be improved. Further, since the rotating decoration body unit 3100 can be held in the ascending position (retracted position) by magnetizing the holding magnet 3166 and the rotating decoration body driving motor 3106, the rotation of the present example having a weight capable of producing a rotation effect. Even the decorative body unit 3100 can be sufficiently held in the retracted position.

  Further, a rack gear 3152b along the slide axis is provided on the outer peripheral side surface of the slide member 3152, and the slide member 3152 is moved in the slide axis direction by rotating the pinion gear 3158 meshing with the rack gear 3152b by the lift drive motor 3160. Therefore, the slide member 3152 can be moved with a simple configuration, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from increasing, and the slide member 3152b and the pinion gear 3158 can be engaged by engaging the slide member 3152b. It is possible to increase the responsiveness of the movement of the 3152, to make the movement of the slide member 3152, that is, the rotating decoration body unit 3100 more agile, and to respond to various movement effects. Entertain Interest in the technique can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first slide holding member 3154 is disposed on the inner side surface of the slide member 3152 opposite to the rack gear 3152b, and the second slide holding member 3156 is inserted and disposed in the slit 3152c of the slide member 3152, thereby sliding the member 3152. Is prevented from moving in a direction perpendicular to the slide axis, and is held so as to be movable in the slide axis direction. The slide member 3152 includes two first slide holding members 3154 and one second slide holding member 3156. Therefore, the sliding member 3152 can be smoothly moved in the direction of the slide axis without rattling, and the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is shaken during movement due to the rattling. The movement of body unit 3100 looks unnatural Can be prevented from becoming a Shii things, amused to ensure movement of the rotary decoration member unit 3100 is interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the two first slide holding members 3154 can hold the slide member 3152 so that the rack gear 3152b of the slide member 3152 does not interfere with each other, and the one second slide holding member 3156 is provided in the slit 3152c. Thus, the movement range of the slide member 3152 can be made substantially the same as the length of the slit 3152c, and the slide member 3152 can be reliably held so as to be movable.

  Further, a pinion gear 3158 that meshes with the rack gear 3152b of the slide member 3152 is disposed on an axis that passes through the first slide holding member 3154 on the outer side in the left-right direction and extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the slide axis. Since the member 3154 can prevent the rack gear 3152b of the slide member 3152 from moving at least away from the pinion gear 3158, the engagement between the pinion gear 3158 and the rack gear 3152b becomes incomplete and the slide member 3152 cannot be moved, or it is possible to prevent the pinion gear 3158 and the rack gear 3152b from being unevenly worn due to poor meshing, thereby causing a malfunction, and the slide member 3152 can be reliably moved. With durability Reliability) can be enhanced.

  Further, since the slide member 3152 is formed of a transparent material, when the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is moved by the slide member 3152, the slide member 3152 is moved to a position where the slide member 3152 is visible from the player side. However, it is possible to make the slide member 3152 difficult to recognize by making the slide member 3152 difficult to see, and by recognizing the slide member 3152, it is possible to prevent the rotation decoration body unit 3100 from enjoying the movement and to have an interest in the game. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, since the detection piece 3162b of the detection member 3162 that moves along with the movement of the transparent slide member 3152 is detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164, the detection member 3162 is detected even if the slide member 3152 is transparent. By detecting with the sensor 3164, the moving position of the slide member 3152 can be detected with certainty, and the slide member 3152, that is, the rotary decoration body unit 3100, can have a desired movement (movable effect) to entertain the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Further, since the detection member 312 is made of an opaque material and a relatively inexpensive sensor such as a photoelectric sensor can be used for the elevation detection sensor 3164, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first rotating member 3112 as the rotating member is rotated by the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 according to the gaming state, the outer periphery of the first rotating member 3112 can be relatively rotated. The second rotating member 3114 thus rotated also rotates, and the second shaft member 3118 guided by the guide portion 3112b provided on the rotating surface 3112a of the first rotating member 3112 moves in the outer direction by the centrifugal force due to the rotation. At the same time, the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 that pivotally support the rotating decorative body 3102 move in directions away from each other in the circumferential direction, so that the first shaft member 3116 of the second rotating member 3114 is moved around the first shaft member 3116. The rotating decorative body 3102 rotates and rotates in a state where a part of the rotating decorative body 3102 protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the second rotating member 3114. On the other hand, before the first rotating member 3112 is stopped, the locking member 3128a of the locking member 3128 is inserted into the locking portion 3114a of the second rotating member 3114, and the second rotating member 3114 is stopped by rotating first. The rotation of the first rotation member 3112 relative to the second rotation member 3114 causes the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 to move in a direction approaching each other with respect to the circumferential direction, and the second shaft member 3118. Is guided and moved inward by the guide portion 3112b, the rotating decorative body 3102 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction protruding from the first shaft member 3116, and the portion protruding outward from the outer periphery is retracted inward. Thus, it is possible to produce a rotation effect that returns to the initial state.

  Accordingly, when the first rotating member 3112 is rotated, a part of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3102 protrudes outside the outer periphery of the second rotating member 3114, so that the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114 are included. The appearance of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is greatly changed, and the player can be surprised, and the change of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 can increase the expectation for the game, and the interest for the game is reduced. Can be suppressed. Further, since the appearance of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 largely changes due to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3102 projecting from the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114, the rotational decorative body 3102 of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is changed. The impact of the rotation effect can be increased, the rotation effect by the rotation decoration body 3102 can be easily noticed, the player can enjoy the rotation effect by paying attention to the rotation decoration body 3102, and the player's Interest can be strongly attracted, and this pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  In addition, as described above, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3102 are projected by the centrifugal force generated by the rotation of the first rotating member 3112, and the configuration relating to the protruding movement of the rotating decorative body 3102 in the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the proportion of the configuration related to the projecting movement in the rotary ornament body unit 3100, and relatively, a space including the rotary ornament body decoration substrate 3124, the rotation lock mechanism 3126, and the like. Can be easily ensured, and the rotary ornament body unit 3100 that can further enhance the interest of the player can be realized.

  Further, since the guide part 3112b is provided on the disk-shaped rotation surface 3112a of the first rotation member 3112 to support the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3102, the rotation decoration body 3102 is moved outward by the rotation of the first rotation member 3112. When the rotation is stopped, the surface of the rotation surface 3112a covered with the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3102 appears so as to be visible from the player side due to the protrusion movement of the rotation decoration body 3102. The appearance (appearance) of the entire body unit 3100 can be greatly changed, and the impact on the player can be increased.

  By the way, when the rotating decorative body 3102 is moved backward by the biasing means using a biasing force such as a spring as the retracting means for retracting the rotating decorative body 3102, the rotating decorative body 3102 can be projected by centrifugal force. It is necessary to use an urging means having an urging force that is weaker than the centrifugal force applied thereto, and the urging means fatigues and generates a desired urging force by repeatedly projecting and retracting the rotating decorative body 3102. There is a possibility that the rotating decorative body 3102 cannot be moved backward. On the other hand, when the second rotating member 3114 rotating together with the first rotating member 3112 is stopped first, the first rotating member 3112 of the first rotating member 3112 is compared with the first shaft member 3116 of the second rotating member 3114. The biaxial member 3118 moves in a direction approaching the circumferential direction, and the second axial member 3118 is guided and moved along the guide portion 3112b so as to keep the distance from the first axial member 3116 by the movement. The portion where the rotating decorative body 3102 rotates around the first shaft member 3116 and protrudes outward from the outer periphery can be retracted inward. Thus, the second rotating member 3114 only needs to be stopped first, and the configuration relating to the retracting means including the rotation lock mechanism 3126 can be simplified, and the energizing means using the energizing force as the retracting means can be provided. There is no need to use it, and the durability of the rotating decorative body unit 3100 can be improved and the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

  In addition, the rotation axes of the first rotation member 3112 and the second rotation member 3114 in the rotation ornament body unit 3100 are arranged so as to face the front-rear direction, and the rotation decoration protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the second rotation member 3114. Since the rotation surface of the body 3102 faces the player side, the rotating decoration body 3102 that rotates is easy to see, and the change in the overall appearance of the rotation decoration body unit 3100 due to the protrusion of the rotation decoration body 3102 can be easily understood. It is possible to make the rotation effect by the rotating decoration body unit 3100 more enjoyable and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  In addition, since the rotation surfaces of the first rotation member 3112, the second rotation member 3114, and the rotation decoration body 3102 are substantially parallel to the surface of the game area 605 into which the game ball is to be driven, The outer diameter of the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114 (projecting rotating decorative body 3102) rotating around the rotation axis can be increased as compared with the case where the rotating decorative body 3102 is oriented. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and the impact of the rotary ornament body unit 3100 can be further increased, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  The claims that can be grasped from the above embodiment and technical ideas other than the claims are described below together with the effects thereof.

(Solution 1)
After the start condition is satisfied, a variable display device is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information based on the start condition being satisfied to display and display the display result, and the variable display is performed when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied In the gaming machine that controls the profit granting state to give a profit to the player after deriving and displaying the specific display result on the device,
Effect condition determining means for determining whether or not an effect condition satisfied when at least the winning condition is satisfied is determined before the start condition is satisfied;
Start information storage means capable of storing start information indicating that the start condition is satisfied, up to a predetermined number so that the order in which the start conditions are satisfied can be specified;
Start winning determination means for determining whether or not the winning condition is satisfied based on the start information for which the start condition is satisfied among the start information stored in the start information storage means when the start condition is satisfied;
Start state determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied when the winning condition determination means determines that the winning condition is satisfied;
A variation mode of the variable display device from the start of variation display of the plurality of types of symbol information to the derivation display of the display result based on the determination result of the start time determination unit and the start state determination unit. A variation mode determining means for determining;
Display control for controlling the display of the variable display device based on the variation mode determined by the variation mode determination unit, and for deriving and displaying the display results according to the determination results of the start time failure determination unit and the start time state determination unit. Means,
Based on the determination result of the effect condition determination means, whether or not to execute a prior effect that suggests that the ratio to control to the profit granting state is high before the start condition of the start information corresponding to the start condition is satisfied Preceding effect determination means for determining whether or not,
A preceding effect executing means for executing the preceding effect when the preceding effect determining means determines that the preceding effect is to be executed;
As the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect executing means, the effect condition determining means is selected from among a plurality of types of effect modes set so that the ratios to be executed differ according to the expected degree of establishment of the winning condition. The production mode determination means for determining any production mode according to the determination result,
Effect mode change determining means for determining whether or not to change the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition;
The preceding effect executing means is the preceding of the effect mode having the lowest expected establishment condition of the winning condition among the plurality of types of effect modes, regardless of which effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining unit. After executing the production, every time the production mode change determination means determines that the production mode of the preceding production is changed, the success condition is expected to be established next to the production mode of the preceding production being executed. Change to a low production mode and execute the preceding production,
The effect mode change determination means, when the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect execution means matches the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means, the effect mode of the preceding effect A game machine characterized in that it is determined that the game is not changed.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution means 1, regardless of which of the effect modes determined by the effect mode determination means, the preceding effect of the effect mode with the lowest expected establishment condition among the plurality of types of effect modes. After performing the above, every time it is determined that the effect mode of the preceding effect is changed according to the establishment of the change condition, the effect mode with the lower expected expectation condition of the winning condition is set next to the effect mode of the preceding effect being executed. Since it is changed, it is possible to have interest in the establishment of the change condition, and it can be noted whether the effect mode of the preceding effect is changed when the change condition is established. In addition, when the effect mode of the preceding effect that is being executed matches the effect mode of the preceding effect determined by the effect mode determining means, the effect mode of the preceding effect is not changed. It is possible to prevent execution of a predecessor effect in an effect mode having a higher expectation degree of establishment of the winning condition than in an effect mode according to the expected degree of establishment, and it is possible to execute a predecessor effect according to the expected degree of establishment of the winning condition.

(Solution 2)
The effect mode change determining means determines whether or not to change the effect mode of the preceding effect based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied during the execution of the preceding effect by the preceding effect executing means. A gaming machine according to Solution 1.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solving means 2, since the effect mode of the preceding effect can be changed every time the variable display device starts the variable display of the multiple types of symbol information, the variable display device can display the multiple types of symbol information. When the variable display is started, not only the display result of the variable display but also the change of the effect mode of the preceding effect can be noted, and the game entertainment is improved.

(Solution 3)
A game board in which a game area into which a game ball is to be driven is formed on the front surface;
A passage opening provided in the game area of the game board and through which a game ball can pass;
Passage detection means for detecting a game ball passing through the passage, and
The effect mode change determining unit changes the effect mode of the preceding effect based on the fact that the passage detecting unit detects a game ball passing through the passing port during the execution of the preceding effect by the preceding effect executing unit. It is determined whether or not the gaming machine according to Solution 1 or Solution 2.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution 3, since the effect mode of the preceding effect can be changed every time the game ball passes through the passage opening, not only the variable display of a plurality of types of symbol information executed by the variable display device. Further, it can be noted whether or not the game ball passes, and the game interest is improved. In addition, a game can be played aiming at the passing of the game ball to the passage opening, and a new game can be provided.

(Solution 4)
The variable display device has a plurality of start storage display areas for individually displaying the start information stored in the start information storage means,
The preceding effect executing means includes the start information displayed in the plurality of start memory display areas, the start information determined by the preceding effect determining means to execute the preceding effect, as the plurality of types of effect modes. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the preceding effect is executed by performing display control in any effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution means 4, a plurality of types of start information for which the determination that the preceding effect is to be executed is made among the plurality of start storage display areas for individually displaying the start information stored in the start information storage means. In order to execute the preceding effect by controlling the display in any of the effect modes, the variable display according to the start information in which the preceding effect is executed even when the variable display of the symbol information is not executed It is possible to make the player have expectation before starting the game, and the gaming interest will be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 400 Handle device 410 Operation handle part 600 Game panel 600e Opening part 601 Front component 605 Game area 621 Back box 621b Rear wall 621c Opening 630 Panel holder 635 Panel back plate 1400 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
1400a to 1400d First hold display area 1400e to 1400h Second hold display area 3000 Back unit 3400 Character unit (movable decorative body unit)
3402 Character body (decorative body)
3402a Head (upper decorative body)
3402b Body (lower decoration)
3402c Right arm part 3410 Character body moving mechanism 3411 Unit base 3412 Upper guide member 3413 Lower guide member 3413e Slope piece 3413f Body part slit (lower guide part, guide hole)
3414 Slide base 3414a Upper rack gear 3415 Rack member 3415a Lower rack gear 3415b Detection piece 3416 Head support arm (upper rotation support portion)
3416a Arm 3416b Support hole 3417 Body support arm (downward rotation support)
3417a Arm portion 3417b Support hole 3418 Character body drive motor 3419 Drive gear 3420 Sub gear 3425 Character body movement detection sensor 3426 Slope member 3426a Head slit (upper guide portion, guide hole)
3450 Head movable mechanism 3451 Head base 3452 Head upper support member 3453a Upper piece 3352b Support shaft 3453 Head lower support member 3453a Lower piece 3453b Support shaft 3453c Slide shaft (insertion pin)
3454 Head crank 3455 Head solenoid 3456 Head decoration board 3470 Body movable mechanism 3471 Lower member 3472 Right arm drive motor 3473 Fan drive gear 3474 First driven gear 3475 Transmission shaft 3476 Second driven gear 3477 Upper member 3477a Upper piece 3477b Support shaft 3478 Arm gear 3479 Right arm rotation detection sensor 3480 Body lower support member 3480a Lower piece 3480b Support shaft 3480c Slide shaft (insertion pin)
3481 fuselage lens member 3482 fuselage decorative board

Claims (1)

After the start condition is satisfied, a variable display device is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information based on the start condition being satisfied to display and display the display result, and the variable display is performed when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied In the gaming machine that controls the profit granting state to give a profit to the player after deriving and displaying the specific display result on the device,
Effect condition determining means for determining whether or not an effect condition satisfied when at least the winning condition is satisfied is determined before the start condition is satisfied;
Start information storage means capable of storing start information indicating that the start condition is satisfied, up to a predetermined number so that the order in which the start conditions are satisfied can be specified;
Start winning determination means for determining whether or not the winning condition is satisfied based on the start information for which the start condition is satisfied among the start information stored in the start information storage means when the start condition is satisfied;
Start state determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied when the winning condition determination means determines that the winning condition is satisfied;
A variation mode of the variable display device from the start of variation display of the plurality of types of symbol information to the derivation display of the display result based on the determination result of the start time determination unit and the start state determination unit. A variation mode determining means for determining;
Display control for controlling the display of the variable display device based on the variation mode determined by the variation mode determination unit, and for deriving and displaying the display results according to the determination results of the start time failure determination unit and the start time state determination unit. Means,
Based on the determination result of the effect condition determination means, whether or not to execute a prior effect that suggests that the ratio to control to the profit granting state is high before the start condition of the start information corresponding to the start condition is satisfied Preceding effect determination means for determining whether or not,
A preceding effect executing means for executing the preceding effect when the preceding effect determining means determines that the preceding effect is to be executed;
As the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect executing means, the effect condition determining means is selected from among a plurality of types of effect modes set so that the ratios to be executed differ according to the expected degree of establishment of the winning condition. The production mode determination means for determining any production mode according to the determination result,
Effect mode change determining means for determining whether or not to change the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition;
The preceding effect executing means is the preceding of the effect mode having the lowest expected establishment condition of the winning condition among the plurality of types of effect modes, regardless of which effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining unit. After executing the production, every time the production mode change determination means determines that the production mode of the preceding production is changed, the success condition is expected to be established next to the production mode of the preceding production being executed. Change to a low production mode and execute the preceding production,
The effect mode change determination means, when the effect mode of the preceding effect executed by the preceding effect execution means matches the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means, the effect mode of the preceding effect A game machine characterized in that it is determined that the game is not changed.

Images